JP6685517B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a "pachi-slot" including a plurality of reels on each surface of which a plurality of symbols are arranged, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. A game machine called is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter, referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and a result of the lottery (hereinafter, “internal winning combination”). ") And the timing of the stop operation, the reel rotation stop control is performed. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the symbol combination relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. Examples of benefits given to the player include payout of game media (medals, etc.), operation of replay (replay) in which internal lottery processing is performed again without consuming game media, and opportunity for payout of game media. The bonus game operation, etc., in which

  In addition, a game machine equipped with a movable accessory is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Patent Document 1 proposes a game machine in which a sub CPU and a torch drive circuit drive a torch according to torch drive data specified by the effect contents.

JP, 2013-17520, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are few types of effects using torches, which are movable parts, and there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is capable of various effects using a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) for determining an internal winning combination,
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and 51L, 51C, 51R described later) configured by a plurality of display columns to variably display symbols necessary for the game,
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R described later) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of display columns and receiving a stop operation of the player;
Stop operation detecting means for detecting stop operation (for example, a stop switch 17S described later),
A stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) that stops and controls the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination unit and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection unit,
Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for controlling the effect of the game,
A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later),
A first surface (for example, a first surface G21a described later) forming a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a second surface opposite to the first surface (for example, a later-described first surface G21a). A plurality of movable accessory members (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15) that have a second surface G21b) and are rotatably provided,
The plurality of movable accessory corresponds to the plurality of stop operation means,
The effect control means,
During the performance of the game, the plurality of movable accessory members are rotated, and the rotation of the movable accessory member corresponding to the stop operation means that has accepted the stop operation is caused by the first surface or the second surface being substantially different from the player. A game machine characterized in that the image projected by a projector is displayed on the first surface or the second surface of the movable accessory that is stopped at a position in parallel.

  According to the present invention, various effects can be performed using a movable accessory.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is the whole front view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a front view which shows a part of external structure in the state which removed the protective cover of the said pachi-slot machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic layout diagram inside the housing of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of a screen housing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of display screen displayed on the image display device of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows another part of the display screen displayed on the image display device of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of the notification of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the abbreviation of the winning combination in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the sub flag conversion table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability random determination table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ1 middle mode up lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 middle point up lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability random determination table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal addition ART lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the number of sets in CT stored on the said pachi-slot machine, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus type lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in which the number of bonus ART games in bonus stored in the pachi-slot machine is increased. It is a diagram showing a bonus lot end CT lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the accessory data table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the state of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine during normal start. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of starting during normal ART of the pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows reel stop control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows BB check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ / ART termination of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control task of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation sequence registration process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the movable screen position determination process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the chance button process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the error display process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the navigation position designation process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the LED data registration process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process of the pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart showing a game recording process of the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen of the image display apparatus of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the F screen error image displayed on the display unit of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the R screen error image displayed on the display unit of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the W screen error image displayed on the display unit of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the error video displayed on the image display device of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st navigation image displayed on the display unit of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd navigation image displayed on the display unit of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during the CT sign in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal symbol combination and the symbol combination actually displayed in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal symbol combination and the symbol combination actually displayed in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the add-on lottery table in ART memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end random determination table memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT precursor in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during MB flag in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in a pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the lock state and notification in the pachi-slot machine of a modification. It is the whole perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the upper part of the pachi-slot machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a display unit in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 138. It is a partial perspective view of the display unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the fixed screen mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded view of the fixed screen mechanism G in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C of the rear screen shown in FIG. 143. It is a bottom view of the fixed screen mechanism G in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a louver drive gear that is a member that constitutes a louver drive unit in the third embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of the louver board and louver drive gear in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the detection state of the sensor at the time of rotation of the louver board in 3rd Embodiment, (a) shows the detection state of the sensor when a louver board rotates counterclockwise seeing from upper direction. FIG. 6B is a table showing the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate rotates clockwise as viewed from above, and FIG. 7C is a table showing the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotating. is there. It is a figure for demonstrating the excitation aspect of the stepping motor in 3rd Embodiment, (a) shows the aspect at the time of rotating the louver board at the maximum speed, (b) shows the aspect at the time of rotating the louver board normally. Indicates. The excitation mode of the stepping motor when performing the backlash motion in the third embodiment is shown, (a) shows the mode of 30-degree backlash motion, and (b) shows the mode of 15-degree backlash motion. It is a figure for demonstrating the coating aspect of the fixed screen mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of three-dimensional decoration in a 3rd embodiment. It is an exploded view of three-dimensional decoration in a 3rd embodiment. It is an exploded view of the light transmission member in a 3rd embodiment. It is the DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of LED and a crystal part in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing the production lottery table used in the normal game state and the production state A in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production lottery table used in the normal game state and the production state B in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production lottery table used at the time of the normal game state and the production state C in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production lottery table used at the chance zone (CZ) and production state C in the third embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the production in production state C of a 3rd embodiment, and shows the state before receiving a start command. It is a figure for explaining the production in production state C of a 3rd embodiment, and shows the state after receiving a start command. It is a figure for explaining the production in production state C of a 3rd embodiment, and shows the state after the 1st stop operation. It is a figure for explaining the production in production state C of a 3rd embodiment, and shows the state after the 2nd stop operation. It is a figure for explaining the production in production state C of a 3rd embodiment, and shows the state after the 3rd stop operation. It is a figure for explaining the production in production state C of a 3rd embodiment, and shows the state after receiving a winning operation command. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of a louver board in an origin is a top view, (b) is a front view. It is a figure for demonstrating the "special" production mode in 3rd Embodiment, Comprising: (a) of the louver board rotated 45 degrees from the origin is a top view, (b) is the figure seen from diagonally upward. . It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of a louver board rotated 90 degrees from the origin is a top view, (b) is a front view. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of the louver board rotated 135 degrees from the origin is a top view, (b) is the figure seen from diagonally upward. . It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of "special" in 3rd Embodiment, (a) of a louver board rotated 180 degrees from the origin is a top view, (b) is a front view. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition propriety of the production state within lock time in 3rd Embodiment. The production state transition lottery table used in the production state A in the third embodiment is shown. The production state transition lottery table used in the production state B in the third embodiment is shown. The production state transition lottery table used in the production state C in the third embodiment is shown. It is a figure for explaining a modification of a production using a louver screen in a 3rd embodiment, (a) is a front view of a louver board in the origin, and (b) is a louver rotated 45 degrees from the origin. It is a front view of a board, (c) is a front view of the louver board rotated 90 degrees from the origin, (d) is a front view of the louver board rotated 135 degrees from the origin, and (e) is an origin. It is a front view of the louver board rotated 180 degrees. It is a figure for explaining the 2nd modification of the production using a louver screen in a 3rd embodiment, and (a) is a front view and a top view of a louver screen and a back screen in an origin, b) A front view and a top view of a louver screen and a rear screen rotated 90 degrees from the origin, and (c) is a front view and a top view of the louver screen and a rear screen rotated 180 degrees from the origin. (A) is a side view of a display unit when the front screen mechanism in a 3rd modification is in a 1st movement position, (b) is a front view of a front screen mechanism. (A) is a side view of a display unit when the front screen mechanism in a 3rd modification is in a 2nd movement position, (b) is a front view of a front screen mechanism. (A) is a side view of a display unit when the front screen mechanism in a 3rd modification is in a front exposure position, (b) is a front view of a front screen mechanism. It is a figure which shows the other example of the image displayed on the front screen mechanism in the 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement in 3rd Embodiment, and the aspect which is displaying the image on the back screen is shown.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment uses medals as a game medium for playing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, etc. can be applied in addition to medals. Since these are valuable in games, they may be called game values or game values. Further, in the present embodiment, the replay probability becomes higher than the normal time during the assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) which is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like and the specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “ART”) in which the function RT is simultaneously operated will be described.

[Function flow of pachi-slot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when the player inserts a medal and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachi-slot machine 1 selects one value from random numbers within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) ( Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted. Strictly speaking, the unit game is started by extracting a random number based on the fact that a predetermined switch detects a game start condition by operating the start lever 6.

  The internal winning combination determination means (the internal lottery process of FIG. 80 executed by the main CPU 93 described later) performs the lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means detects the start operation of the unit game for the start lever 6 by the start switch 64 (see FIG. 32) which constitutes the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation of the game (establishment of a predetermined start condition). ), The internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined winning probability. The internal winning combination may be referred to as a winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means may be referred to as a winning combination determining means or a pre-determining means.

  By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus are given to the player, and other so-called "miss". And related items are provided.

  Subsequently, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R have been rotated, reel stop control means (a main CPU 93, stepping motors 51L, 51C described later). , 51R) controls the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing of pressing the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. Since the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are capable of variable display of symbols, they may be referred to as variable display or variable display.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 ms) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called "the number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination allowing the display of the winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel combination is used for the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) by using the above specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the specified time is used to reel in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so that it is not displayed along the effective line. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning. Determine whether or not. The symbols displayed when the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped may be simply expressed as a stop display or a display result. Displaying a combination of symbols on the activated line by stopping a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as derivation of a stop display or derivation of a display result, and an internal winning combination is derived. It may be expressed as an acceptable condition.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line based on the fact that the reel stop control means stops the fluctuation of the symbols. It should be noted that it is only necessary to be able to generate a "winning prize" by determining whether the symbol stopped on the activated line is related to the "winning prize", and the "winning prize" was awarded due to the internal winning combination and the stopped symbols. It may or may not be determined whether or not the winning combination matches. Although security is enhanced when it is performed and security is slightly degraded when it is not performed, the program capacity of the main ROM 94 described later can be reduced.

  When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, various effects can be produced by using light (image) output by the display unit 100, sound output by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Done.

  When the start lever is operated, a random number value for production (hereinafter, a random number value for production) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines, from among a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the effect content to be executed this time. A sub-control board, which will be described later, plays a role of the effect contents determination means.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in association with each trigger such as the start of the reel rotation, the stop of the rotation of each reel, and the determination of the presence or absence of a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed for) is executed by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
The functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  A casing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 is a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front portion of the cabinet 61, and a lower front portion of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b arranged in the. The cabinet 61 may be referred to as the gaming machine main body. Further, since the cabinet 61 functions as a frame body that supports the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be called a support body, a support frame, a fixed frame, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the door members provided on the front side of the gaming machine are the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, but this is merely an example, and the gaming machine has one to three or more door members. The invention disclosed in this specification may be applied to the extent possible.

  The cabinet 61 is composed of a cabinet upper portion 61a and a cabinet lower portion 61b separated from the cabinet upper portion 61a by an intermediate support plate 301, and accommodates devices used in a game (for example, a hopper device).

  The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shapes and sizes of the openings in the cabinet upper portion 61a and the cabinet lower portion 61b, respectively. The upper door 62a is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the cabinet upper portion 61a, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the opening of the cabinet lower portion 61b.

  The display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet upper portion 61a. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and constitutes a display unit that displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

  On the front surface of the display unit 100 on the upper part 61a of the cabinet, a protective cover 20 is provided on which the image displayed on the display unit 100 is visible. The protective cover 20 has a light-shielding property with respect to light incident from the outside to the inside, and prevents the visibility of various images displayed on the display unit 100 from being deteriorated by external light. The protective cover 20 in the present embodiment is made of a member having a transmittance of about 50% to 80%.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in the upper center of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later. In the display window 4, an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a downward right diagonal cross down line are displayed. Further, on the back side of the display window 4, a reel unit (not shown) constituting the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is detachably attached.

  As shown in FIG. 4, panels 21a and 21b are provided inside the protective cover 20 of the upper door 62a so as to hide the left and right display areas of the display unit 100. Areas having a light-transmitting property are formed on the panels 21a and 21b. In this area, decorative portions 22a and 22b each having a pattern representing a game state are arranged.

  The decorative portions 22a and 22b in the present embodiment are formed by a pattern representing the game state provided on the panels 21a and 21b. The decorative portions 22a and 22b are provided with decorative LEDs 23a and 23b (see FIG. 32) as light sources that emit light from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed in the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed by the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, the center line of these five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, “the number of inserted medals” includes both the number of BETs by the operation of the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted coins actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on the outer peripheral surface of which a symbol string as identification information, which is composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game, is drawn. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol row is variably displayed.

  Below the display window 4, a pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed. In the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a medal slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, an LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

  By depressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3) provided for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, each time the bet button is pressed once, one medal is inserted. When the 1 bet button is operated three times, the three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the activated line is activated.

  The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are referred to as “insertion operation”.

  On the horizontal surface of the pedestal portion 10, a chance button 33 is provided as a production operation means used for production. The effect operation means is not limited to the button such as the chance button 33, and may be configured by another mechanism such as a lever or the MAX bet button 11.

  The chance button 33 is provided with a chance button LED 34 (see FIG. 32) as a production operation light source. The chance button LED 34 in the present embodiment is provided so as to illuminate the chance button 33 from the inside so that the opportunity button 33 appears to be illuminated when illuminated.

  An information display 14 is provided in the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in correspondence with the number of medals inserted in the game this time (hereinafter, the number inserted). In addition, the information display 14 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). A digital display (not shown) that digitally displays to the player is provided.

  Further, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the notified stop operation information. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "push order combination", which is a combination in which the combination of symbols to be displayed differs depending on the order of stop operations (push order), is provided. The aspect uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, displaying “1” when notifying the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)”. , "2nd" is displayed when the push order "2nd (first stop operation is performed on the inner reel 3C)" is displayed, and the push order "3rd (first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R). "To do") is displayed when "3" is displayed. Details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

  As shown in FIG. 32 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 54. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify the stop operation information. The display unit 100 may notify the information of the stop operation.

  In this case, the notification mode of the instruction monitor and the notification mode of the other means may be different modes. That is, in the instruction monitor, it is sufficient to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor). Even if displayed, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification, so it cannot be said that it is a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when notifying the pushing order “1st”, the instruction monitor uniquely displays “1” corresponding to the pushing order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) causes the first stop operation to be left. It is also possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. . Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the game state. More specifically, the information about the stop operation may be notified in the below-described ART game state (see FIG. 36) without notifying the information about the stop operation in the below-described general game state (non-ART).

  Further, on the left side of the front surface portion of the pedestal portion 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player by a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

  On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the tilting operation of the player and starting the variable display of the symbols in the display window 4 is predetermined. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range.

  Stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the player's pressing operation are provided at approximately the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6, and ends when all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  The touch panel unit 201 is provided on the front surface of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The touch panel unit 201 has an image display device 201a such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the touch panel unit 201 has a left side of the front surface of the lower door 62b that is erected substantially vertically from the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10 (MAX bet button 11 or the start lever 6 side). It is provided in.

  The touch panel unit 201 has a touch sensor 201b which is superimposed on the image display device 201a and constitutes a contact input device capable of contact input, and a user interface image or the like according to a player's operation received via the touch sensor 201b. The display of can be switched. The touch sensor 201b operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacitance method, and when a player's operation is received, it outputs a signal according to the operation as touch input information. The touch panel unit 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201b.

  Speakers 9L and 9R for producing effects such as sound effects and voices are provided on the front side of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout port 15 for paying out medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. The medal receiving portion 16 that stores the paid out medals is provided at the lowermost portion of the lower door 62b.

  Further, in the lower front surface of the lower door 62b, on the surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16 above and below, there is a waist panel 25 having a design corresponding to the motif of the model. It is installed. The waist panel 25 is illuminated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Structure of display unit]
Next, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet upper portion 61a. As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle Etc.) and a shape, which is generated based on the shape, is projected to enable a highly sophisticated and powerful effect.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 7, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely lowers and rearwards the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 constitutes a video output unit that outputs a video by irradiation light. The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear of the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the backward direction. It is designed to flow. The ventilation holes of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the direction of air flow in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror holder B31 has a front surface formed in a rectangular plate shape. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and has a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and the mounting holes B334, B344 in the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311, B311 and the mounting holes B314, B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33, B34 come into contact with the left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holder B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and this screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screw penetrating the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 is the same as that of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 are screwed together.

  Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are screw-fastened via the mounting holes B314, B334, B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34. B32 is clamped. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, B331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B11 at the positions where the angle adjusting holes B311, B331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

  A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected to each other. It is sandwiched between. Then, the screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head portion comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from popping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13, B13 symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 is projected more forward than the cabinet 61 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion on the front side of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding horizontally from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to have a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the width of the second protruding portion B131b is formed wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet 61.

  A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are opened by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. As shown in FIG. 13, the perforated plate B15 has an upper part B15a on the front side, an inclined part B15b on the middle side, and a lower part B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by bending the rear side of the inclined portion B15b in the horizontal direction.

  The upper side portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. As shown in FIG. 11, the front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is arranged in an upper position that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that allows the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is tilted substantially parallel to and close to the tilted part B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes exist. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 14, for example. Even if the irradiation light device B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up from the eye position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 15, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. As a result, the display unit 100 can unitize the irradiation light device B and the screen device C into a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 16, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing upright at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing upright at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 provided upright on the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, by connecting the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, the front side on which the player is located and the top side on which the irradiation light device B is located are formed. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, which form the screen housing C10, are independently formed into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached thereto. Has been As a result, even if the screen device C cannot be commonly used as a unit as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be made common for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there are provided a central placing portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right placing portion C12 and a left placing portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction centering on the central placing portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 are positioned at the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 6, the front side portion C14 contacts the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 when the display unit 100 is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61, so that the inside of the cabinet 61 inside. It is possible to perform rearward positioning. The display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61 by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged beside the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions coincide with each other in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws by fastening the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61. Then, the user extends his / her hand into the cabinet 61 and holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands, and the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61. After that, as shown in FIG. 18, for example, a hand is extended into the screen device C from one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit 100, and the crank gear E21 which is viewed in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door 62a is opened, the hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and then from the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates a drive motor F21 as a first accessory driving means configured by an accessory driving means that drives the reel screen driving mechanism F2 as a movable accessory.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 19, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface thereof. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 to be aggregated and can be wired to the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, so that the relay board CK is placed in front of the back wall of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 6, a through hole 303 of an intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

  Accordingly, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring work and eliminating the need to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom in designing the device C is expanded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is incorporated in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by extending the hand through the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. It can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen casing C10, a screen mechanism as a plurality of display devices for displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is provided so that irradiation targets can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 20, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 21, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position, and a front exposure position sensor for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position. E15b is provided. For example, the front standby position sensor E15a and the front exposure position sensor E15b are each configured by a photo sensor.

  In the present embodiment, the front standby position corresponds to the first reference position or the second reference position. The front standby position corresponds to the first position, and the front exposure position corresponds to the second position. Therefore, the front standby position sensor E15a constitutes a first position sensor, and the front exposure position sensor E15b constitutes a second position sensor.

  The front exposure position may correspond to the first reference position or the second reference position. Further, the front standby position may correspond to the second position, and the front exposure position may correspond to the first position. In this case, the front standby position sensor E15a constitutes a second position sensor, and the front exposure position sensor E15b constitutes a first position sensor.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is provided with a reel standby position sensor F19 for detecting that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position. For example, the reel standby position sensor F19 is composed of a photo sensor.

  In the present embodiment, the reel standby position corresponds to the first reference position or the second reference position. The reel standby position corresponds to the first position. Therefore, the reel standby position sensor F19 constitutes a first position sensor.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the reel screen mechanism F1 has a narrow movable range, the reel exposure position sensor is not provided. However, like the front screen mechanism E1, for example, the reel screen mechanism F1 is set at the reel exposure position. The reel exposure position sensor may constitute the second position sensor by providing a reel exposure position sensor (not shown) for detecting that there is such a situation.

  Further, the reel exposure position may correspond to the first reference position or the second reference position, the reel standby position may correspond to the second position, and the reel exposure position may correspond to the first position. In this case, the reel standby position sensor F19 constitutes a second position sensor, and the reel exposure position sensor constitutes a first position sensor.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the turning distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the turning distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation regions due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on the condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is in the standby position. This prevents interference when the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 rotate.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a bottom surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, respectively.

  The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as it has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D to the front. Is set to. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are symmetrically arranged with the front reflection portion D1 as the center. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. As a result, the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 can easily reflect the irradiation light to the reflecting surface toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflecting portion D4 as well, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction, part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the lightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light emitted from the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to irregular reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In addition, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, the reflection of the irradiation light on the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

  As the lightness, the brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) or the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can express other colors with relative values with respect to white.

  The brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is lower by 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be made black. For example, white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material applied to a base material may be used.

  In such a coating, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be about 10 to 20%). As a paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known paints for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). .

  The black pigment is not included in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to reduce the brightness of the base material itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the peripheral wall, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 23, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed in a flat shape so that an image without distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

  On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b linearly formed at both ends in the lateral direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the step E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. The first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness, for example, a pattern related to a game effect.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by being bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state in which the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a on the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to adhesion with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

  The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The drive motor E25 constitutes a second accessory driving means constituted by an accessory driving means for driving the front screen mechanism E1 as a movable accessory.

  The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end portion (one end portion) connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 26, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 16 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) about the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as in FIG. 26, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines forward rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight line portions and a curved line portion connecting the ends of the two straight line portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the surface of the slide groove E22b corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight line portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 shown in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, and the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having 0 degrees of freedom, in which the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake, so that the front screen mechanism E1 does not move.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 match the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 27 and 29, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because the tangential direction of the turning locus is set so as to be orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface to form a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum to rotate the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the crank member E22 includes a detection piece E22c for causing the front standby position sensor E15a (see FIG. 21) to detect the front screen mechanism E1, and a front exposure position sensor for the front screen mechanism E1. A detection piece E22d for detecting by E15b (see FIG. 21) is formed.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 28). At the maximum speed, the speed is gradually reduced, and the stopped state becomes 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached.

  As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped with a small angular acceleration (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

  The front screen mechanism E1 at the front standby position in the standby position and in the front exposed position in the exposure position is a stationary position that can be stopped even in a non-excited state in which the drive motor E25 is not excited. That is, the front standby position corresponds to the first stationary position, and the front exposure position corresponds to the second stationary position. The front standby position may be the second stationary position and the front exposure position may be the first stationary position.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position. In addition, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 has a pattern formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion serves as the projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, an image can be displayed by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One ends of the left and right reel screen support parts F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen part F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protrusion not shown. The protruding portion horizontally protrudes to the outside of each reel screen support portion F12, F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 at the reel standby position and the reel exposed position corresponds to a stationary position that can be stopped even in a non-excited state in which the drive motor F21 is not excited. That is, the reel standby position corresponds to the first stationary position, and the reel exposed position corresponds to the second stationary position. The reel standby position may be the second stationary position and the reel exposure position may be the first stationary position.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Performance by screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a planar image display, a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect). It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

  For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to be emitted by the irradiation light from the irradiation device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image is caused to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, so that the distortion occurs when the irradiation light is emitted. It is possible to make an image with no image appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to be displayed by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflecting portions included in the fixed screen mechanism D cause a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect). It is possible to cause a certain image to appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

  In addition, for example, when the screen mechanism for displaying an image by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, by displaying the image on the reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using this curved image can be executed.

[Display example of touch panel unit]
Next, the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a part of a display screen displayed on the image display device 201a. As shown in FIG. 30, the image display device 201a displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, and 215. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201b of the touch panel unit 201.

  The top screen 211 is an initial screen of the display screens displayed on the touch panel unit 201, and displays the MENU button 211a and the outline game history 211b. The MENU button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 by being operated (tapped) by the player. The outline game history 211b displays a part of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1 (summary game history). In the present embodiment, as the outline game history, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed.

  The menu screen 212 is a menu of a display screen displayed on the touch panel unit 201, and includes a return button 212a, a record button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB site button 212f. And a volume button 212g are displayed. The return button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 by being operated by the player. Further, the record button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons that are called by the player to call up the corresponding display screens.

  For example, when the record button 212b is operated by the player, the record operation screen 216 regarding the record of the information regarding the game (hereinafter, simply referred to as “game information”) as shown in FIG. 31 is called. In recent years, pachislot machines have been widely used as a service for registering a player for each model and managing various game information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission based on the game history of the player. There is. The recording operation screen 216 called by the recording button 212b is an operation screen related to this service.

  As shown in FIG. 31, a recording start button 216a, a recording reference button 216b, a recording end button 216c, a registration button 216d, a return button 216e, and a MENU button 216f are displayed on the recording operation screen 216. .

  The recording start button 216a is an operation button for starting recording of game information. When the recording start button 216a is operated, the identification information of the pachi-slot machine 1 and a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) representing the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the server are displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone, the mobile terminal can register the combination of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the user in the server.

  The record reference button 216b is an operation button for referring to game information. When the record reference button 216b is operated, a two-dimensional code representing the recorded game information is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can display the recorded game information directly or via the server. Incidentally, when the record reference button 216b is operated, the recorded game information may be displayed on the image display device 201a or the like.

  The recording end button 216c is an operation button for ending the recording of the game information. When the recording end button 216c is operated, recording of the game information is ended, and a two-dimensional code representing the recorded game information is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can register the recorded game information in the server.

  The registration button 216d is an operation button for registering the user in the service. When the registration button 216d is operated, a two-dimensional code representing the URL of the server is displayed. By reading this two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal can access the site for registering the user in the service. The return button 216e and the MENU button 216f are operation buttons for displaying the menu screen 211 and the menu screen 212 on the touch panel unit 201.

  In FIG. 30, when the player operates the explanation button 212c, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, explanation of specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as bonus winning probability and ART winning probability for each set value, and introduction of characters appearing in the effect of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  When the player operates the array payout button 212d, the array payout screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence relationship (payout table) between the combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the privilege when it is determined to be a prize, and the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Rows (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

  When the reach eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The reach eyes of the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed on the reach eye screen. In addition, the reach eyes are a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the activated line. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eyes lip shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach eye lip is displayed along the activated line, then a state advantageous to the player (for example, bonus state, normal ART or CT (Fig. 36))).

  Further, when the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, a WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachi-slot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachi-slot machine 1 Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

  When the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of sounds output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

  Here, since the touch panel unit 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and in the game (that is, while the effect is being executed on the display unit 100). Even if there is, the display of the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 can be switched. The player may want to know the characters that appear in the effect on the display unit 100, for example. In such a case, by operating the explanation button 212c and calling the explanation screen, the relationship between the characters and the like can be understood. Can be grasped during the game. In addition, the player may want to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guide for winning the rare combination during reel rotation when the so-called rare combination is won. In such a case, the array payout button 212d It is possible to grasp the reel arrangement by operating and to call the arrangement payout screen.

  The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens that display a detailed game history including a summary game history displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a return button 213a, a MENU button 213b, a previous button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The return button 213a and the MENU button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen 213 is switched to the game information screen. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. Further, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The game information screen 214 displays a return button 214a, a MENU button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The return button 214a and the MENU button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the forward button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screens in a predetermined order. Further, the game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) rushes and the number of successes in the pachi-slot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZ, the number of rushes and the number of successes of each of CZ1 to CZ1 to 3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

  The game information screen 215 displays a return button 215a, a MENU button 215b, a previous button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215a and the MENU button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screen in a predetermined order. Further, the game history 215e displays the number of winnings of a so-called small winning combination in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the winning probability (fraction of numerator 1).

  The display screens displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 may be switched based on tap operations on operation buttons displayed on the respective display screens, or based on swipe operations on the display screens. It may be switched.

[Electrical structure of pachi-slot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 arranged in the cabinet 61 and a sub-control board 72 arranged in the lower door 62b. The reel control terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet-side control board 53, the door control terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 71. ing.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and outputs signals output from the main control board 71 to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. Relay.

  The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R change the symbols by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, that is, the start lever 6 being operated by the player (start operation). Let The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R form a symbol changing means. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  An external centralized terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage box switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

  The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 61, and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates a medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage switch is full of medals.

  A power switch 44a is connected to a power board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when the pachi-slot machine 1 is supplied with necessary power.

  On the door relay terminal plate 54, a medal sensor 46, a door opening / closing monitor switch 61, a BET switch 62, and a settlement device, which are arranged on a medal selector (not shown) arranged on the back side of the lower door 62b, connected to the medal insertion slot 22. The switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 69 are connected.

  That is, when it is determined that the flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process. When determining that the accessory stop flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus (S504), and ends the start command reception process. The medal sensor 46, the door opening / closing monitor switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub relay board 69 are the main control boards via the door relay terminal board 54. 71 is connected.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that a medal has passed through a selector (not shown), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The door opening / closing monitor switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The BET switch 62 detects that the player has pressed the MAX bet button 11 and the 1 bet button, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The medal sensor 46 and the MAX bet button 11 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting the insertion of a game medium.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button 13 is pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 71.

  The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with stop switches 17S corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The stop switch 17S is a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, that is, each stop button 7L, 7C, 7R for detecting that the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player. The corresponding stop switch 17S constitutes stop operation detecting means.

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making. The 7-segment display 28 and the LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70 illuminates, for example, a mark that indicates the start of a game or a mark that performs a replay.

  The sub relay board 69 relays the wiring that connects the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, the sub relay board 69 relays the wiring that connects the sub control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub control board 72. That is, the sub control board 72, the sound I / O board 81, the LED board 82, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, the touch sensor 201b, and the projector mechanism B2 are electrically connected to the sub relay board 69. Has been done.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub relay board 69 from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 by serial communication in one direction. Further, the sub control board 72, via the sub relay board 69, the sound I / O board 81, the LED board 82, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, the touch sensor 201b, the projector mechanism B2, and the drive motor E25. The drive motor F21, the chance switch 35 as an effect operation detecting means for detecting the pressing of the chance button 33, the front standby position sensor E15a, the front exposure position sensor E15b, and the reel standby position sensor F19 are electrically connected to each other. It is connected. The drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21 are configured by a two-phase excitation type stepping motor.

  The sound I / O board 81 outputs sound to the speakers 9L and 9R. The LED board 82 causes the LEDs included in the LED group 75 to emit light in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 34) to display a blinking pattern.

  The LED group 75 is a reel back lamp (not shown) composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged to illuminate the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, decoration LEDs 23a, 23b, and chance buttons. The LED 34 and the like are also included.

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 has a sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening / closing of the lower door 62b attached to the frame of the lower door 62b, and based on the state of the sensor (for example, if the sensor is in the on state). Closed, open if off state), and save history of opening and closing the lower door 62b.

  Further, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 sends a signal indicating that the lower door 62b is opened to display an error on the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a when the lower door 62b is opened, to the sub control board 72. (Sub control circuit 101).

  Due to the door opening / closing structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, the upper door 62a is locked with the lower door 62b closed so that the upper door 62a cannot be opened unless the lower door 62b is opened. No sensor to detect opening / closing is installed.

  As described above, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, the front standby position sensor E15a, the front exposure position sensor E15b, and the reel standby position sensor F19 are detected by the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1 due to an error, and the hopper device 43 detects the error. The sensor (not shown) for detecting an abnormality and the medal sensor 46 constitute error detecting means for detecting an error by the main control circuit 91.

  A ROM cartridge board 76 and a video relay board 77 are connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 76 is a board for managing a control program executed by the sub CPU 102, and an image (video) for presentation, sound, light (LED group 75), and communication data.

  The video relay board 77 is a board that converts a video signal transmitted from the sub-control board 72 to the projector mechanism B2 and the image display device 201a according to the signal standard of the projector mechanism B2 and the image display device 201a and relays the signal.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a main control circuit 91 as a main control unit has a microcomputer 92 installed on a main control board 71 as a main component and controls the progress of the game. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 96 and a random number generator 98 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 generates a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The main CPU 93 outputs a pulse to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R by detecting a reel index (not shown) provided on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Count the number of times. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has rotated once. This reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R with a photo sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R makes the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) having a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) required for rotating one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared to a predetermined value (for example, 0) when the reel position detection section (not shown) detects the reel index.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, the number of symbols rotated after the reel index is detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position at which each reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle stage of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle stage of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the sub-control circuit 101 as the sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and determines or executes the effect contents based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. And the like, and controls peripheral devices such as the projector mechanism B2, the LED group 75, and the speakers 9L and 9R. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a VRAM 105 also functioning as a frame buffer, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task (not shown) for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and a random number value for effect are extracted, and effect contents (effect data) are determined and registered. The effect contents determination process (see FIG. 107) executed from the main board communication task is included. The sub CPU 102 that executes the effect contents determination process constitutes an effect determination unit and an effect execution unit.

  In the control program, an accessory control task for controlling the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 as a movable accessory and the reel screen mechanism F1 based on the effect content determined in the effect content determination processing, and the effect content determination processing. A main task that mainly controls display of an image by the display unit 100 (see FIG. 2) and the touch panel unit 201 based on the determined effect contents, an LED control task that controls light output by a light source such as the LED group 75, and a speaker 9L. , 9R to control the sound output by the voice control task.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation. Further, it includes a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, pump data regarding a pattern for turning on / off light, a storage area for storing accessory data (see FIG. 79) regarding operation of a movable accessory.

  The sub RAM 103 stores a storage area for registering the effect contents and effect data determined in the effect content determination process (see FIG. 107), a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91, and the like. A backup storage area for storing the game status transmitted from the main CPU 93, the internal winning combination, and the game information displayed on the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is provided.

  That is, the game information displayed on the game information screens 213, 214, 215 displayed on the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 is stored by a backup power supply (not shown) even when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is off. The played game information is maintained.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the VRAM (including a frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created video on the display unit 100 or the image display device 201a.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 9L and 9R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 75 according to the lamp data designated by the content of the effect.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 by the drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21 according to the accessory data designated by the effect contents.

[Pachislot machine game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, a game state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages a game state based on whether or not a bonus is won / operated, a type of an internal winning combination relating to replay, and a winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 35, the main control board 71 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2,) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is non-winning and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is the bonus winning state and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state is Indicates that the bonus is operating.

  Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95, and whether or not the bonus is activated is provided in the main RAM 95. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the bonus-winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus-winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  Further, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations relating to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which there is a low probability that the winning combination associated with replay is determined as an internal winning combination, and the RT1 gaming state is a winning combination involving an internal winning combination related to replay. Is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of a winning combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is high.

  These RT0 game state to RT5 game state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags, RT1 gaming state flag to RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the RT gaming state by managing ON / OFF of these flags in the main RAM 95. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag that is ON as the current RT gaming state. If all the RT game status flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT game status is the RT1 game status.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the winning combination (F_BB1,2) is determined as the internal winning combination in the (1) bonus non-winning state, the main control board 71 switches from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Transition state. Then, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the state between flags to the bonus state when a bonus winning combination is won in the state between (2) flags.

  Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state when the number of medals paid out exceeds the specified number (216) in the (3) bonus state. In the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state when (4) 20 games have passed, and (5) Bell spill is displayed before 20 games have passed. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. In the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the (5) bell spill is displayed.

  Further, the main control board 71, (6) RT3 transition state is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the RT2 transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 transition lip is displayed in the (7) RT3 gaming state. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state. Further, the main control board 71 (8) when the bell spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, in the RT4 gaming state When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Here, the bell spill is determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bell (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd), which will be described later, is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, the RT2 transition lip is in the pushing order determined for each type of maintenance lip when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described below is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT3 transition rips, in the case where the RT3 rep (F_RT3 rep_1st, F_RT3 rep_213, F_RT3 rep_231, F_RT3 rep_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of the RT3 rep. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT4 transition rips, in the case where the RT4 rep (F_RT4 rep_123, F_RT4 rep_132, F_RT4 rep_2nd, F_RT4 rep_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of the RT4 rep. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Game state transition flow regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on whether or not the bonus is won / operated, the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay, and its winning probability, while notifying the stop operation advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the game state regarding presence / absence of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between the normal gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of the notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) in which the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. On the contrary, the ART game state is a game state in which a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state advantageous to the player. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player is allowed to perform a game so as to shift from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state advantageous to the player. Become.

  The general gaming state is a gaming state in which the RT0 to RT4 gaming states are unwinned in ART. As shown in FIG. 36, the normal game state is composed of a normal game state and CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state and CZ are gaming states in which the destination gaming state is different, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state shifts to CZ, and the CZ shifts to the ART gaming state. A game is played.

  The normal game state is the most unfavorable game state in the pachi-slot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal game state to CZ. Specifically, in the normal game state, a transition lottery to CZ is performed, and (A) When this transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal game state to CZ.

  CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation of shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, the lottery for transitioning to ART is performed, and (B) If this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from CZ to the normal game state, and (C) this. When winning the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the ART preparation.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning in the RT4 gaming state, and the RT gaming state starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 35, since the RT4 gaming state is to be transferred from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not started immediately even after the winning of the ART. Absent. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT4 game state after the winning of the ART is set as the ART preparation, and the stop operation necessary for the transition to the RT4 game state is notified during the ART preparation.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 36, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. Normal ART and CT are game states with different playability, and normal ART is a stop operation advantageous to the player for a predetermined number of games (for example, to display a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out). Is a game state in which a stop operation and a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 game state are notified), and CT is a notification of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and the addition of the normal ART duration is added. It is a game state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, a game is usually played without digesting the duration of ART.

  As shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or the general game state. Specifically, in the normal ART, the transfer lottery to the CT is carried out. (D) If the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal ART to the CT. Further, the normal ART is managed for the duration, and (E) When this duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). A method of managing the duration of the normal ART is arbitrary, but the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment manages the duration according to the number of games. Of course, instead of the number of games, the duration may be managed based on the number of medals paid out during the normal ART and the number of medals paid out during the normal ART. The duration may be managed by the number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility that CT will shift to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of CT is managed, and (F) When this duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from CT to normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described later in detail (see FIG. 67).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36, there is a possibility of shifting to the bonus state from the normal game state (normal game state or CZ) and the ART game state (normal ART or CT). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, (2) when a bonus-related winning combination is won in the general game state and the ART game state, the main control board 71 changes the game state from the general game state or the ART game state to the bonus state. To move.

  In the bonus state, the lottery for the transition to the ART is performed, and (G) If this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the normal game state (normal game state or CZ). (However, when the ART game state (normal ART or CT) has been shifted to the bonus state, the main control board 71 is changed from the bonus state to the ART game state (normal ART or CT even if the transition lottery is not won). ) To move the game state). Further, (H) When the transfer lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is over, the RT1 game state is entered. Therefore, when the game state is transitioned from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is in the ART preparation state. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 37 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines a correspondence relationship between 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 37 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L. 3C, 3R, in the order of movement in the rotation direction, the correspondence relationship is assigned in which the symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbols located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 37, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 37 represents codes for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this embodiment are, as described above, "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", "hat". , “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2”, and “Cactus 3”.

  In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). For the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2), "00000010" is assigned as data. "00000011" is assigned as data to the "1 on Chile" symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each pattern (design code 4-10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3" , “0000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege (combination), data to be stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a combination of the symbol is displayed. Stipulates the corresponding relationship with the privilege (the number of medals paid out).

  In the present embodiment, the winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus game (continuous differential differential device). In addition, when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, the so-called “out” occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to "off" is not defined in the symbol combination table, and thus the symbol combination of "off" is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the "combination" item may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "combination".

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and "data (bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in 1-byte data) stored in the storage area. Data) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of the respective symbols. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 38 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the activated line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. In each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols forming the combination.

  In addition, the payout number defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 40, when the combination name “C_9 coins A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

  Further, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the feature of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 38, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 35). ).

  The combination names “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye B_02” are bell spilled eyes. When the spilled bell is displayed along the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 35).

  The combination names “C_maintenance rep A_01” to “C_maintenance rep G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, top line, or cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the activated line, the replay is activated.

  Also, the combination names “C_RT2 Lip A_01” and “C_RT2 Lip A_02” are RT2 transition Lips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state is shifted to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 35).

  Also, the combination name “C_RT3 Lip_01” is an RT3 migration Lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is operated and the RT game state is shifted to the RT3 game state (see FIG. 35).

  The combination names “C_RT4 Lip A_01” to “C_RT4 Lip D_02” are RT4 transition Lips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state (see FIG. 35).

  Also, the combination names “C_Chillilip A_01” to “C_1 Probable Chilelip D_01” are Chilelip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed in the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, in the present embodiment, the symbol “on top of dust” and the symbol “on bottom of dust” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile design is a name when the design “Chile top 1” and the design “Chile bottom” are regarded as one design. When the Chilelip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is activated.

  The combination name “C_Chillilip A_01” among the chilirips is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbols are displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed in the display window 4, and will be described below. Sometimes called "single lip". Further, among the chilirips, the combination names “C_chirilip B_01” and “C_chirilip C_01” are combinations of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed on two reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, and in the following, it may be referred to as “double chili lip”. Further, among the chillips, the combination names “C_chillip D_01” to “C_1 definite chillip D_01” are combinations of symbols in which the Chile symbols are displayed on all reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or It is a combination of symbols displayed when a stop operation for displaying a combination of symbols fails (so-called, when the user presses a wrong button), and may be referred to as a "three consecutive chili lip" hereinafter.

  Further, the combination names “C_reach eye lip A_01” to “C_reach eye lip P_02” are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special symbol combination is displayed in the display window 4. For example, the combination name “C_reach eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is activated.

  Further, the combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the ninth in BB. When the ninth coin out of the BB is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9 out of the BB, the combination of the symbols excluding the combination name “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” is 7 symbols in any of the 5 lines displayed in the display window 4 (the symbol "White 7" or symbol "blue 7") is a combination of symbols displayed in a line (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination fails). Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "7 in BB". On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the 5 lines, and in the following, “7 in BB” May be called.

  The combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out.

  The combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first sheets. When the first coin is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are confirmed results. When the confirmed outcome is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the activated line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names “C_weak 2 pieces A_01” to “C_weak 2 pieces B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 pieces A_01” to “C_strong 2 pieces C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the activated line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each winning combination. 42 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 43 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, random number values for lottery extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values according to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative. An internal lottery is performed by making a determination (whether a so-called "carriage" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by "lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. By comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 42, it can be seen that the types and winning probabilities of the replay combinations determined as the internal winning combinations are different in each gaming state. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chiririp (No.25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No.31)" are internal in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, in the RT4 game state, when "F_chiririp (No.25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No.31)" are determined as the internal winning combination, peculiar control (described later) Flag conversion), but this specific control will be described later.

  Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, the “F_reach-eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with the “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3 to 6, No. 15-18), and “F_reach-eye lip A to D” are not independently determined as internal winning combinations. Therefore, when "F_reach eyes Lips A to D" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (a combination of symbols corresponding to "F_reach eyes Lips A to D" is seen from the player). When displayed), the bonus winning combination (F_BB1,2) is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

  In addition, the RT5 gaming state, which is the state between flags, carries over the bonus-related winning combination as an internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 43, the winning combination relating to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
44 to 49 are comparative tables showing a correspondence relationship with a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the activated line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a symbol combination (combination) can be displayed. In addition, in the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 45 to 51, the combinations of all the symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are enumerated. Even a combination of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially drawn in) is made to differ according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current game state, and in terms of the symbol to be preferentially drawn in, a circle is drawn. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, the correspondence relationship between the type of winning combination and the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS. 50 and 51.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during non-flag and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations is omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the state between flags and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of winning combinations, a “pushing winning combination”, which is a combination in which different combinations of symbols are displayed according to the order (pressing order) of stop operations, is provided. The combination of symbols associated with the “press order correct answer” in FIG. 50 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order, and corresponds to “incorrect press order”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, the pressing order that is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the "press order correct answer" is displayed. It should be noted that even in the ART game state, the pushing order which is an incorrect answer may be notified, which will be described later in detail.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the correct push order.
Specifically, the end "1st" of the combination name means that the correct pushing order is for the first reel stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the end "2nd" of the combination name is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the ending "3rd" of the winning combination is the correct push order when the first stop operation is the right reel. It is meant for 3R. In addition, the ending "123" of the winning combination name means that the correct pressing order is "left, middle, right", and the ending "132" of the winning combination name is the correct pressing order is "left". , Right, middle ”, and the ending“ 213 ”of the winning combination name means that the correct pressing order is“ middle, left, right ”, and the ending“ 231 ”of the winning combination name. Means that the correct pushing order is "left, right, middle".

  As shown in FIG. 50, the combination “F_Chililip” is a combination in which the symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 44 of the Chilelip (see FIG. 38). ~ Any one of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in Fig. 49 is displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, refer to Figs. 44 to 49 of the replay (see Fig. 38). Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the activated line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 44 to 49, the combination “F_Chillip” cannot display the triple Chillip (“C_ChillipD_01” to “C_1 SureChillipD_01”), and the single Chillip (or “C_Chillip”). It can be seen that only A_01 ”,“ C_chillip B_01 ”, and“ C_chillip C_01 ”) can be displayed. That is, the winning combination “F_Chillip” is a winning combination that cannot display three consecutive Chilerips.

  In addition, the combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, among the chililip (see FIG. 38). 44 to 49 of the replay (see FIG. 38) when any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the activated line and the pressing order is not correct. Any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in 49 is displayed along the activated line. It should be noted that, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 49, it is understood that the combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” can display three consecutive chilirips. That is, the winning combination “F_probable Chilelip” and “F_1 probable Chilelip” are the roles that can display three consecutive Chilerips.

  In addition, the combinations “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach-eye lip ( Of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the replay (FIG. 38)), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed along the activated line.

  In addition, the pressing order of the correct answer in the part “F_chiririp”, “F_certain chirip”, “F_1 sure chililip” and the part “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” may be arbitrary, but this embodiment In the above embodiment, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in the game in which the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach-eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

  In addition, the combination “F_maintenance rep A” and “F_maintenance rep B” are any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the replay (refer to FIG. 38) regardless of the pressing order are effective lines. Is displayed along with. In addition, the combination “F_maintenance rep_1st” to “F_maintenance rep_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 38). 44-49 among the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. 49 are displayed along the activated line, and when the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition rep (see FIG. 38) is selected. Any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 are displayed along the activated line.

  Further, the combination “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rep (see FIG. 38). Is displayed along the activated line, and if the pushing order is not correct, one of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the replay (see FIG. 38) is displayed on the activated line. Are displayed along.

  Further, the combination “F_RT4 Lip_123” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rep (see FIG. 38). Is displayed along the activated line, and if the pushing order is not correct, one of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the replay (see FIG. 38) is displayed on the activated line. Are displayed along.

  In addition, the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 40). Is displayed along the effective line, and when the pressing order is not correct, the bell spill (see FIG. 38) or the first sheet (see FIGS. 40 and 41) is displayed.

  In addition, the combination “F_common bell” is displayed along the activated line, regardless of the order of pressing, among the bells (see FIG. 40), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 is displayed. In addition, the combination “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Sabo 2” are any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the cactus (see FIG. 41) along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

  In addition, for the combination “weak chili”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the weak cherries (see FIG. 41) is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. In addition, as for the combination “F_strong chili 1” and “F_strong chili 2”, any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 49 of the strong cherry (see FIG. 41) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination in the flags and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in the inter-flag state and a combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state (some winning combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1 “C_BB2”) can be displayed. In the “whether BB is established” in FIG. 51, “◯” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “x” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

  When BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination other than the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combinations of symbols displayed according to the winning combinations other than the winning combinations are as shown in FIG. For example, in the winning combination “F_BB1 + F_Chilirip”, BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of symbols of the correspondence shown in the winning combination “F_Chillilip” is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, it may be possible to display only the symbol combination displayed at the time of pressing order correct answer shown in FIG. 50, or only the symbol combination displayed at the time of pressing order incorrect answer can be displayed. You may

  For example, in the role “F_BB1 + F_3 choice bell_1st”, since BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols of the correspondence shown in the role “F_3 choice bell_1st” in FIG. 50 is displayed. In this case May display only the bell that is displayed when the correct press order is displayed, and may not display the spilled bell or the first page that is displayed when the wrong press order is displayed. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1 + F_RT3 rep_1st”, only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rep displayed when the pressing order is correct may not be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the inter-flag state, when the bonus winning combination and one of the “off”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2” and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of winning part>
Heretofore, the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped manner has been described. Next, a data table used when performing various types of lottery in the normal game state or the ART game state will be described. In the following, since the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, the data table concerned The abbreviation of the winning combination will be explained before the explanation. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing abbreviations of winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are called the role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are called the “push order bell”, The role "F_Common Bell" is called the role "Common Bell", the role "F_Sabo 1" and "F_Sabo 2" is called the role "Cactus", the role "F_Weak Chile" is called the role "Weak Cherry", and the role "F_Strong" "Chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2" are called "strong cherry".

  In addition, the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 promising chiriplip” are called a winning combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” when the flag conversion lottery is won, and a “replay” when the flag conversion lottery is not winning. Similarly, the winning combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" is called a winning combination "reach-eye lip" when winning the flag conversion lottery, and a non-winning winning when the flag conversion lottery is called "replay".

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles “F_certain Chilelip”, “F_1 certain Chilelip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is independently won during the RT4 game state. If it is determined as, the flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 gives a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) when the flag conversion lottery is won.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the combination of the symbols “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 probable chiririp” is displayed when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the combination of symbols “replay” is when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "three consecutive chilirip" by treating the winning combination "F_ sure chililip" and "F_1 sure chililip" as the winning combination "three consecutive chililip" (For example, press the button to aim at the Chile pattern). On the other hand, in the case where the flag conversion lottery has not been won, the winning combination “F_probable chilirip” and “F_1 probable chilirip” are treated as the winning combination “replay”, and information for displaying the symbol combination of “replay” is notified (for example, , Informs the pressing order other than the normal pressing).

  Similarly, the combination of symbols "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" is displayed when the correct press order is displayed, and the combination of symbols "replay" when the wrong press order is displayed. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is treated as a role “reach-eye lip”, and the combination of symbols of the “reach-eye lip” is treated. Information to be displayed is notified (for example, by pressing forward, the symbol "white 7" is aimed). On the other hand, in the case of not winning the flag conversion lottery, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" by treating the combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" as the role "replay". To inform.

  By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive chili lip” or “reach eye lip” is displayed and a special privilege is given. From the pachi-slot machine 1, although a special privilege is given according to the fact that the flag conversion lottery is won, from the player's point of view, the special combination is displayed because the combination of the symbols "3 consecutive chilirips" is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

  In order to improve the playability of the pachi-slot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is constant, rather than constant. Stop control (combination of symbols to be displayed) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, so as a method of varying the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given, depending on the state, the winning probability of the combination is made different. A method can also be considered (in the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be made different according to the presence or absence of a bonus operation or the RT gaming state, so that, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing another gaming state such as RT6 gaming state or RT7 gaming state is also possible). However, since the trigger for changing the winning probability of the winning combination (the trigger for shifting the RT gaming state) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the winning combination is not changed, and in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are given as a privilege. It is possible to flexibly change the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the symbols are given according to the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given, and conversely, in a state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols to which the privilege is given. The appearance frequency of can be reduced.

  In the following, in order to win the flag conversion lottery in the case where the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of “f_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” is “3 consecutive It is sometimes referred to as "Cililip" (or simply converted into "three consecutive Chileips"), and when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations. To win the flag conversion lottery is referred to as converting the roles "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" to "reach-eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach-eye lip"). There is.

<Sub-flag conversion table>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, because of restrictions, the main control board 71 cannot directly send the internal winning combination to the sub control circuit 101. Therefore, based on the sub flag conversion table as shown in FIG. A subflag that groups winning combinations is added to the start command and transmitted.

  In the sub-flag conversion table as shown in FIG. 53, “out” as an internal winning combination is associated with “0” as a sub-flag indicating “miss”. “F_Chillilip” as an internal winning combination is associated with “1” as a subflag indicating “two consecutive Chile”.

  "F_probable chili lip" as an internal winning combination is associated with "2" as a sub-flag indicating "3 consecutive chili A". "F_1 definite chiririp" as an internal winning combination is associated with "3" as a subflag indicating "three consecutive chili B".

  “F_reach-eye lip A” as an internal winning combination is associated with “4” as a sub-flag indicating “reach-eye lip 1”. "F_reach-eye lip B" as an internal winning combination is associated with "5" as a sub-flag indicating "reach-eye lip 2".

  “F_reach-eye lip C” as the internal winning combination is associated with “6” as a sub-flag indicating “reach-eye lip 3”. "F_reach-eye lip D" as an internal winning combination is associated with "7" as a sub-flag indicating "reach-eye lip 4".

  “F_Maintenance Lip A” and “F_Maintenance Lip B” as internal winning combinations are associated with “8” as a sub-flag indicating “Replay”. “F_Maintain Lip_1st”, “F_Maintain Lip_2nd” and “F_Maintain Lip_3rd” as internal winning combinations are associated with “9” as a sub-flag indicating “Press Order Lip 1”.

  "F_RT3 Lip_1st", "F_RT3 Lip_213", "F_RT3 Lip_231" and "F_RT3 Lip_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "10" as a sub-flag indicating "Press Order Lip 2".

  "F_RT4 Lip_123", "F_RT4 Lip_132", "F_RT4 Lip_2nd", and "F_RT4 Lip_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "11" as a sub-flag indicating "Press Order Lip 3".

  "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd" and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" as internal winning combinations are associated with "12" as a sub-flag indicating "push order bell". "F_common bell" as an internal winning combination is associated with "13" as a sub-flag indicating "common bell".

  "F_Sabo 1", "F_Sabo 2", "F_RB combination 1", "F_RB combination 2" and "F_RB combination 3", "F_RB combination 4" as internal winning combinations are "cacti" as sub-flags. 14 ”.

  “F_weak dust” as an internal winning combination is associated with “15” as a sub-flag indicating “weak dust”. “F_strong Chile 1” and “F_strong Chile 2” as internal winning combinations are associated with “16” as a sub-flag indicating “strong Chile”.

"F_special 1" and "F_special 2" as internal winning combinations are associated with "17" as a sub-flag indicating "reach 1". "F_special 3" as an internal winning combination is associated with "18" as a sub-flag indicating "reach eye 2".

[Game flow during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the flow of the game in the general game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, by shifting from the normal gaming state of the general gaming state to the CZ of the general gaming state, and then shifting from the CZ of the general gaming state to the ART gaming state, the general gaming state (non-ART) to the ART gaming state (See FIG. 36). FIG. 54 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the normal game state of the normal game state to the CZ of the general game state.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the normal gaming state has a low-probability state and a high-probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state have different expectations for winning the CZ lottery that is performed during the normal gaming state. The low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. In addition, when the CZ lottery performed in the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 36).

  The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones with different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ to be shifted from the normal game state is randomly selected from these CZ1 to CZ3.

  Subsequently, FIG. 54 (B) is a diagram showing a game flow when shifting from the general game state CZ1, CZ2 to the ART game state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks with different expectations for winning the ART lottery during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

  During CZ1, a 6-level mode is used as the rank, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues the first game number (for example, 12 games at maximum), and the promotion lottery of the mode is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

  Further, during CZ2, 10 stages of points are used as the rank, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, 15 games at maximum) continues, and the points are randomly selected based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

  In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character A compete is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character B compete. This battle effect continues for the third number of games (for example, 4 games at maximum), the win / loss is managed based on the result of the ART lottery, and when the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and the non-winning is performed. The enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, the ART lottery is performed based on each game and the internal winning combination. When the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the battle effect, the ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle effect is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, in the case of not winning the ART, the player loses in the battle effect in the latter half of the game, and basically the game state thereafter shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when winning the ART, the player wins in the battle effect in the second half, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur, and in this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via ART preparation).

  Subsequently, FIG. 54C is a diagram showing a flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general game state to the ART game state. The CZ3 continues for the fourth game number (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs the ART lottery based on the internal winning combination every game. The CZ3 ends at the time when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional opportunity zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and in this case as well, the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional opportunity zone) via ART preparation. On the other hand, if the fourth number of games has passed without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is fixed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60, a data table used during the normal gaming state will be described.

<Normal high / high probability lottery table>
FIG. 55 is a normal medium-high probability random determination table used for the transition random determination in the CZ random determination state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 55 (A) is a normal medium / high probability random determination table used when shifting the random determination state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 55 (B) is a normal medium-high probability random determination table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of a bonus, etc., and is referred to at the time of setting change, at the end of bonus or at the end of CZ, ART.

  The normal medium / high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines the lottery value information regarding the CZ random determination state after the transition in association with the current CZ random determination state and the winning combination.

  In addition, in the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, “0” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “very low” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0% to less than 1%”. "Extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is defined, and "Low" means that the lottery probability is "10%". Means that a lottery value corresponding to "less than 30%" is defined, "medium" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is defined, “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “extremely high” means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. It means that the value is defined, and "Extremely high" is defined as the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%". Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  Then, in various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, and “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). An internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for lottery with the specified lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether so-called "carriage" has occurred). Be seen.

  Referring to the normal medium / high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 55 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ random determination state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. . Further, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, the cactus, the weak cherry, and the strong cherry as the internal winning combination. .

  The normal medium / high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 55 (B) defines lottery value information regarding the random determination state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. By referring to the normal medium / high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 55 (B), it is understood that the random determination state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
56 is a CZ lottery table used for the CZ lottery, and FIG. 56 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing the CZ lottery based on the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when the CZ lottery is performed to determine whether or not to pull back the CZ when the CZ fails or the ART ends.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56A defines the lottery value information regarding the winning / non-winning numbers of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. By referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (A), it is understood that when the current CZ lottery state is in high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case of low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (B) defines lottery value information regarding winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (at the time of non-winning of the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2) and at the end of the ART game state, the pullback lottery of CZ is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (B).

<Mode up lottery table during CZ1>
FIG. 57 is a CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table used for CZ1 mode-up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The CZ1 middle mode up lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 59A, which will be described later, in CZ1, the higher the mode, the higher the probability of winning the ART lottery, and when it goes to mode 6, it always wins the ART lottery. The lottery result “mode 1UP” means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result “mode 2UP” means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of the CZ1 is increased from "2" to "4". In addition, when the winning of the lottery result “mode 6UP_freeze occurrence” is won, a freeze occurs, and the winning of the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<Point lottery table in CZ2>
FIG. 58 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for point-up lottery of CZ2 in the first half of CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 59B, which will be described later, in CZ2, the higher the number of points, the higher the probability of winning the ART lottery, and when point 10 is reached, the ART lottery is surely won. In addition, "point 2UP" in the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2. For example, when the current point is "2", if "Point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is " It will increase from 2 "to" 4 ". In addition, when the winning of the lottery result “Point 10UP_freeze occurrence” is won, a freeze occurs, and the lottery is won and the CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
59 and 60 are CZ mid ART lottery tables used for ART lottery during CZ, and FIG. 59 (A) is a CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. 59B is a CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ2) used in the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 59 (C) is a CZ used for the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 59D is a CZ middle ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for the ART lottery in CZ3, which is a middle ART lottery table (common for CZ1 and CZ2, during the second half battle).

  The ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 59A defines the lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current mode. The CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 59B defines lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current point. Referring to the CZ ART ART lottery table (for CZ1) and the CZ ART ART lottery table (for CZ2), it is understood that the higher the rank (mode or point) in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

  The CZ ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the second half battle) shown in FIG. 59C defines the lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 during the second half battle), when a rare combination (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning combination in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2, You can see that you will win the ART lottery with a probability.

  The ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 60D defines lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. By referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ3), it is understood that if the ART lottery is won during CZ3, the CT is also won.

[Game flow during normal ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as an ART game state (see FIG. 36), and the inside of the CT is a chance zone to be added. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a game is played aiming at the transition to CT during normal ART. FIG. 61 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of a lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games in the normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. Further, the CT lottery state is provided with four stages of low probability, normal, high probability and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during the normal ART. The CT lottery state affects CT lottery performed during the normal ART and flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state (that is, in the ART game state), the role “F_certain Chilelip”, “F_1 certain Chilelip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach”. If any one of the “eye lip D” is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 refers to the ART level and the CT lottery state during the normal ART and performs the flag conversion lottery. As a result, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given and a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" and a combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" (for example, Press to give a notice that the desired pattern is aimed at). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of "Replay" (for example, a notification of a pressing order other than the normal pressing) is performed. By performing a stop operation according to this notification by the player, a combination of symbols according to the contents of the notification, that is, a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" and a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. Is displayed, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of symbols of "Replay" is displayed.

[Data table used during normal ART]
Subsequently, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66.

<ART flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 62 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination, first, the flag conversion lottery in the first stage is performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the flag conversion lottery in the second stage is performed. When the second-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 promising chililip” are converted into “three consecutive chililip”, and the first-stage flag conversion lottery or the second-stage flag conversion lottery is performed. If it is not won, it is treated as a "replay" without converting the winning combination "F_probable chilirip" and "F_1 probable chililip" into "3 consecutive chilirips".

  FIG. 62 (A) is an ART mid-flag conversion lottery table used for the first-stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 62 (B) is an ART mid-flag conversion lottery table used for the second-stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 62A defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in the first stage in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the flag conversion lottery in the first stage is performed only for the winning combination “F_probable chilirip” and “F_1 probable chilirip”, and for the winning combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”. Only the flag conversion lottery in the second stage is performed.

  The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 62B defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in the second stage in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In the normal ART, until the CT is won once, the “First time (until once CT is won)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and (B), in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used for the first step and the second step. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be simulated as lottery performed using a random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent years, pachi-slot machines are required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) for payout, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, on the main side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the game playability while suppressing the capacity.

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the probability denominator 65536 can be randomly determined by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery status for the second-stage lottery, it is possible to perform not only the internal winning combination but also the flag conversion lottery according to the current state, so that a variety of playability is provided. The flag conversion lottery you have can be performed.

<ART level decision table>
FIG. 63 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The ART level is determined at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 63 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level when the ART is won, and FIG. 63 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

  The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63A defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze occurs at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 57, etc.), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63B defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 63B defines lottery value information about the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART at the time of entering the CT. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuing games, and also the ART level shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium / high probability lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a normal ART medium / high probability random determination table for randomizing the CT random determination state during the normal ART. The normal ART medium-high probability random determination table defines the lottery value information about the CT random determination state of the transfer destination in association with the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “3 consecutive chillips (role“ F_probable chillip ”“ F_1 probable chillip ”wins flag conversion lottery when winning”) and the role “reach eye lip (role“ F_reach eye lip It is understood that the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls down) to "low probability" in "A" to "F_reach-eye lip D". In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it may be contrary to the above description that the CT lottery state easily falls, but FIG. As will be described later, the winning combination “three consecutive chiripip” and “reach-eye lip” must be won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special benefit of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 65 is an ART CT random determination table used for CT random determination during normal ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, when “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “three consecutive chilirip”, “reach eye lip”, and “BB” are determined as the internal winning combination, the probability denominator 256 is within the range. The CT lottery is performed using a random number value. On the other hand, when other winning combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT random determination is performed using a random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” as CT. “Normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” have different expectations of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and “high-accuracy CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT”. Are easily added (see FIG. 70).

<Addition lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 66 is a normal ART mid-time additional lottery table used for extra lottery in which the number of ART games is added during normal ART. The normal lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information on the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a game flow during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, CT is performed by a set of eight games. During CT, the number of ART games is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination. When the additional lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted. Only when the additional lottery is not won, the number of games is subtracted. To be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is ended in eight times in the same set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and (B), if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during CT (that is, if the winning of the flag conversion lottery upon winning the winning combination “F_probable chililip” is won. ) One set of eight games is reset. For example, if 7 games where the number of ART games is not added are played in the same set and another game where the number of ART games is not added is played, the CT ends, but the role "3 consecutive chilirip" If the winning is won, the CT is reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game is played in which the number of ART games is not added eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the winning combination “three consecutive chilirip” is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 67C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During the CT, the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” and “F_1 accurate Chile Lip” are always converted to the winning combination “3 consecutive Chile Lips”. As described above, if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during CT, the CT is reset, and when the winning combination “F_probable chililip” or “F_1 probable chililip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is re-issued. Will be set.

  On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the flag conversion lottery are controlled for the combinations “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” based on a three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, and table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”. Has the highest probability of being converted into "reach-eye lip". If the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, CT is newly added as shown in FIG. 71 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in the high probability CT, the table 0 is always decided regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71.

<Table lottery table during CT>
FIG. 68 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The in-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information about a table used in the flag conversion lottery, in association with a state such as an ART level and a type of CT to be executed. The CT table lottery table is referred to when it is determined to win the CT lottery and shifts to CT, or is referred to at the start of CT, and determines the table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 69 is a during-CT flag conversion lottery table used for during-CT flag conversion lottery. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. By referring to the flag conversion lottery table during CT, it is understood that the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are always converted to the winning combination “three consecutive chilirips” during CT.

<Addition lottery table during CT>
FIG. 70 is an additional lottery table during CT used for additional lottery to add the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Note that winning combinations other than the winning combinations shown in FIG. 70 are not won in the additional lottery during CT.

  In addition, in the additional lottery during the normal CT, the number of additional games differs depending on the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirips” is won during the same CT is “1 to 8”, it is easy to determine “10 games” as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is increased during the same CT. If the winning number of the winning combination “3 consecutive Chilelip” is “9 to 16”, it is easy to determine “20 games” as the number of additional games, and the winning number of winning the winning combination “3 consecutive Chilelip” during the same CT. Is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more" , It is easy to determine “50 games” as the number of additional games.

  More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during the same CT is “1 to 8 times”, the winning combination “3 consecutive chililip” in the figure is selected. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won during the same CT is "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the winning combination "3 consecutive chililip" in the figure is ". 20 games ”. Furthermore, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the winning combination "3 consecutive chililip" in the figure are corresponded. The number of additional games will be promoted to "30 games". Similarly, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" in the figure. The number of additional games to be promoted to “50 games”.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chilirip” is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won, the CT will be reset. You can expect to increase the amount of addition per time as you continue, and the interest during CT will improve.
In addition, the number of times that increases the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 71 is a lottery random determination table in which the number of sets in CT used for lottery is added to the number of sets in which a new CT is added during CT. The number-of-sets addition lottery table in CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the lottery with the number of sets addition, in association with the type of the CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 71, if the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given in association with lottery for adding the number of sets, the new CT is restarted at the timing when the CT being executed ends.

  It should be noted that the number of times the above winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won is counted only during the same CT, but this “during the same CT” is when the lottery is won in addition to the number of sets performed during the CT. It may or may not include the new CT given to the.

[Game flow during bonus state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 72 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the bonus state during the general game state (not winning the ART), and FIG. 72 (B) is the case of shifting to the bonus state during the normal ART. 72C is a diagram showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 72C is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the bonus state is entered during CT. As shown in FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (C), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when shifting to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after completion of the bonus state, the process proceeds to CT via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow becomes different depending on the state before shifting to the bonus state.

  With reference to FIG. 72 (A), in the case of shifting from the normal game state to the normal BB, the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB. If this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is finished, the state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 72 (B), when the normal ART is shifted to the normal BB, the CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. There is a 50% chance that this CT lottery will be won, and if it is won, it will shift to CT after preparing for the ART after the bonus state ends, and if not winning, it will shift to normal ART after preparing for the bonus state after preparing for the bonus state. To do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is also performed.

  With reference to FIG. 72 (C), when the transition from CT to the normal BB or the special BB is made, after the bonus state is finished, the state is transitioned to CT via ART preparation. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus state]
Subsequently, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines lottery value information on the bonus type in association with the state before shifting to the bonus state.

<Additional number of ART games during bonus> Lottery table>
FIG. 74 is a bonus lottery addition table for bonus ART games used in the lottery for ART lottery and the number of ART games performed in the bonus state. The bonus lot ART number-of-addition lottery table defines the lottery result of the ART lottery result and the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The bonus lottery additional lottery table is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the lottery is won in the ART BB in the normal BB after the shift from the normal game state). That is, when 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) is determined as the number of games to be added in the state of ART non-win, the number of games to be won is awarded and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the winning of the ART, the lottery table for adding bonus ART games is used for the lottery for adding ART games.

<CT lottery table at end of bonus>
FIG. 75 is a bonus-end CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The bonus lot end CT lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before shifting to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus lottery CT random determination table shown in FIG. 75, for example, if a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, it is understood that a CT is won at a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 76, an exceptional game flow in the normal game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, during the normal game state, the normal game state is changed to the CZ, and the ART lottery is won by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the RT gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 76, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed. is doing. As shown in FIG. 50, since the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation by the player, even if the notification is not made. , It may happen to shift to the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, in the RT4 gaming state, the combination “F_reach-eyes lip A” to “F_reach-eyes lip D” may be determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state (non-ART), Reach eyes (reach eye lip) to which special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the game is accidentally transferred to the RT4 game state during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed. When it becomes possible, it is possible to shift to the ART game state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" is determined as an internal winning combination in the general game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and If the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is given and the right of ART is given. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the symbol combination of "Replay" is performed and the symbol combination of "Reach eye lip" is controlled not to be displayed.

<Non-art flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 77 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used in the flag conversion lottery performed in the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main control]
In a pachi-slot machine, conventionally, information of a stop operation (pushing order, etc.) is notified under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side in the ART machine, but whether or not there is a notification to the player's benefit ( In recent years, the main (main control board 71) side that manages the profit of the player is required to give the notification because it affects the so-called payout. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the information of the stop operation, and the information of the stop operation is notified under the control of the main side. I am going to do it.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 78, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and “1” to “3” respectively indicate the types of reels performing the first stop operation. "1" means performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, "2" means performing the first stop operation on the inner reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Further, "4" to "9" indicate the pressing order to be notified respectively, "4" means that the pressing order is "left, middle, right", and "5" is the pressing order. "6" means that the pressing order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the pressing order is "middle, right, left". “8” means that the pressing order is “right, left, middle”, and “9” means that the pressing order is “right, middle, left”.

  Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying a bonus winning combination, and "10" means a symbol combination "C_BB1" including "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means a symbol combination "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7". Although not shown in FIG. 78, “0” means that no notification is given, and no numerical value is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly understand the notification contents. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to comprehend the content of the notification just by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the contents of the stop operation are notified on the sub side in addition to the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the display unit 100 controlled by the sub control board 72, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the sub side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. "1" is displayed above to inform that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the pressing order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" above the left reel 3L and "3" above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (A), during the ART preparation, “bell navigation”, “maintenance lip navigation”, “RT3 transition lip navigation” and “RT4 transition lip navigation” are performed under the control of the main side. "Bernavi" informs the combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_1rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of "bell". Further, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the combination "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of "replay". In addition, the "RT3 transition Lip Navi" informs the combination "F_RT3 transition Lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition Lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of "RT3 transition Lip". Further, the "RT4 transition Lip Navi" notifies the combination "F_RT4 transition Lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition Lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition Lip".

  The timing of notification on the main side is arbitrary as long as it is at least during one game of notification. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is received, or the main side may be notified when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when either of the above is accepted. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing at which the notification is given on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification is made on both the main side and the sub side when the start operation is accepted or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display unit 100.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), during the ART game state, "bell navigation", "maintenance lip navigation", "RT3 transition lip navigation" and "RT4 transition lip navigation" are performed under the control of the main side. In addition, during the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, a push for displaying a combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip", "reach eye lip" or "replay" The order is notified, but this notification is performed only on the sub side, not on the main side.

  As described above, the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive chili lip” and “reach eye lip” is related to the granting of a special privilege, so that the presence or absence of the notification affects the profit (ball payout) of the player. Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the displayed symbol combination does not affect the given bonus. That is, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the symbol combination of "Replay" is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In this case, even if the combination of the symbols "three consecutive chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (ball payout), the notification is not given on the instruction monitor on the main side, The display unit 100 gives notification only on the sub side.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and (D), during the RT5 game state (state between flags), a notification is made to aim at a combination of symbols according to a winning combination carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the hand "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the hand "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform “Blue 7 Navi”. The "white 7 navi" informs the winning combination "F_BB1" of the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols "C_BB1", and the "blue 7 navi" responds to the winning combination "F_BB2". Information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols "C_BB2" is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 51, in the inter-flag state, the winning combination related to the bonus and any one of the “off”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations. If the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination along with the bonus winning combination, it is not possible to display the BB winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and (D), when the main control board 71 performs control on the main side, it is different from the combination relating to the carried-over bonus, “off”, “F_special combination 1”, and “F_special combination”. Only when either "2" or "F_special combination 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing when the winning combination of the bonus can be won.

  The main control board 71 may perform “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after notifying that the winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or lighting a bonus confirmation lamp.

  As an example, when a combination related to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is performed over several games is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen may be displayed according to the result of the continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "white 7 navi" is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known on the way, and the interest may be spoiled. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after the bonus notification is given. It should be noted that any method can be used to allow the main side to know the timing at which the bonus notification is made.

  As one technique, when the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus notification, and after the number of games is exhausted, the “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7” A method of performing "navi" can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required to notify the bonus, the main control board 71 notifies the sub-control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, and after the counting result reaches a predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the bonus winning combination and any of the "off", "F_special winning combination 1", "F_special winning combination 2", and "F_special winning combination 3" are determined as internal winning combinations. I do.

  Further, as another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side rather than the sub side can be considered. More specifically, if the main control board 71 decides a bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, the main control board 71 gives an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100. It is determined and the sub-control board 72 is notified. The sub control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is performed can be grasped on the main side.

  Of course, the timing at which the bonus notification is made may be made to be comprehensible on the main side by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can receive. . For example, a signal accompanying a stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, and thus a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than the normal push) is performed in a state where a bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In case of failure, a bonus notification may be given. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 obtains the information about the internal winning combination and the information about the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (the internal winning combination “the winning combination”). , Bonus operation is performed when the stop operation is “other than pressing forward”. Since such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side.

[Data table on the sub-control side]
<Character data table>
As shown in FIG. 79, the accessory data table is referred to by the sub CPU 102 in order to control the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 which drive the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 as the movable accessory, respectively.

  The accessory data table shown in FIG. 79 is a sequence number from the left, an operation content, a step number, a pulse width, a pulse number, motor control directions of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25, and information on step transition (in the figure, “ Step transition ”) is associated.

  The motor control direction indicates the control direction of the drive motor F21 (hereinafter also referred to as "motor A") and the drive motor E25 (hereinafter also referred to as "motor B"). When the motor control direction is "+", the corresponding motor is driven in the direction in which the number of steps increases. When the motor control direction is "-", the corresponding motor is driven in the direction in which the number of steps decreases. When the motor control direction is “+” or “−”, the corresponding motor is driven by the number of pulses by the phase current having the pulse having the cycle indicated by the pulse width.

  When the motor control direction of the motor A and the motor B is “+”, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 move from the standby position direction toward the exposure position direction, and the motor control direction is “−”. In the case of, it moves from the exposure position direction to the standby position direction.

  When the motor control direction is "H", all phases of the corresponding motor are excited, the corresponding motor is stopped, and the stopped state is maintained. That is, when the motor control direction is “H”, the corresponding motor is controlled by the sub CPU 102 so that the stopped state is maintained over the excitation stop time that is the period indicated by the pulse width.

  When the motor control direction is "0", the excitation of all phases of the corresponding motor is stopped, the corresponding motor is not driven, and it becomes rotatable with respect to the external force over the period indicated by the pulse width.

  The information regarding the step transition includes settings, transition conditions, and a transition destination. As for the setting, “1” is set if the transition condition is set, and “0” is set if the transition condition is not set.

  That is, when the setting is "0", the next step is executed after the corresponding step is executed. When the setting is "1", if the transition condition is satisfied while the corresponding step is executed, the transition destination step is executed, and if the transition condition is not satisfied, the next step is executed. .

  The sub CPU 102 manages and controls the position of the front screen mechanism E1 with a step count F based on a movable reference unit. The sub CPU 102 increases or decreases the step count F according to the number of pulses transmitted to the motor A configured by the stepping motor and the motor control direction. Specifically, if the motor control direction of the motor A is "+", the step count F is incremented by 1 every time the number of pulses is updated, and if the motor control direction is "-", the step count F is increased. Decrease by 1.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position to “0” and sets the step count F when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position to “210”. Manages and controls the position of the front screen mechanism E1.

  The front screen mechanism E1 is regulated by a regulation member (not shown) so that the step count F falls within the range of "-2" to "215" with a slight margin in the range of "0" to "210". ing. The movable reference unit of the front screen mechanism E1 is a unit that can be calculated by the movable range (for example, 90 °) of the front screen mechanism E1 and the operating angle of the motor A that moves by one pulse.

  The sub CPU 102 manages and controls the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 with a step count R based on a movable reference unit. The sub CPU 102 increases or decreases the step count R according to the number of pulses transmitted to the motor B configured by the stepping motor and the motor control direction.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count R when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position to “0”, and sets the step count R when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position to “138”. Manages and controls the position of the front screen mechanism E1.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is regulated by a regulation member (not shown) so that the step count F falls within the range of "0" to "138". The movable reference unit of the reel screen mechanism F1 is a unit that can be calculated by the movable range (for example, 148 °) of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the operation angle of the motor B that moves with one pulse.

  In the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, the basic operation 1 having the sequence number 1 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position (step count F = 210).

  Specifically, in step 1, the front screen mechanism E1 is de-energized for 100 ms, and in step 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is driven toward the front exposure position for 250 pulses at a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 1 is Go to step 3.

  However, if the step count F indicating the number of steps of the motor A in the sub CPU 102 becomes 210 or more, the basic operation 1 shifts to step 3 even if step 2 is being executed. In step 3, the front screen mechanism E1 is deenergized for 100 ms.

  Similarly, the basic operation 2 having the sequence number 2 moves the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position (step count F = 0). The basic operation 3 having the sequence number 3 moves the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel exposure position (step count R = 138).

  Specifically, in step 1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is de-energized for 100 ms, and in step 2, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position for 8 pulses at a cycle of 4 ms. Go to step 3.

  However, if the step count R indicating the number of steps of the motor B in the sub CPU 102 becomes 128 or more, the basic operation 3 shifts to step 4 even if step 2 is being executed.

  In step 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position for 180 pulses in a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 3 proceeds to step 4. However, if the step count R is 128 or more, the basic operation 3 shifts to step 4 even if step 3 is being executed.

  In step 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel exposure position for 10 pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 3 proceeds to step 5. In step 5, the reel screen mechanism F1 is deenergized for 100 ms.

  A basic operation 4 having a sequence number of 4 is a sequence for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position (step count R = 0). Specifically, in step 1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is de-energized for 100 ms, and in step 2, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 8 pulses at a cycle of 4 ms. Go to step 3.

  However, if the step count R indicating the number of steps of the motor B in the sub CPU 102 is 10 or less, the basic operation 4 shifts to step 3 even if step 2 is being executed.

  In step 3, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 160 pulses in a cycle of 3 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 3. However, if the step count R is 10 or more, the basic operation 4 shifts to step 4 even if step 3 is being executed.

  In step 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 100 pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5. However, if the reel standby position sensor F19 detects the reel screen mechanism F1, the basic operation 4 proceeds to step 5 even if step 4 is being executed. Hereinafter, the reel standby position sensor F19 is also simply referred to as "sensor C". Further, “OFF → ON” represents that the corresponding sensor has changed from the non-detection state to the detection state.

  In step 5, the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven toward the reel standby position for 2 pulses in a cycle of 5 ms, and the basic operation 4 shifts to step 5. In step 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 is deenergized for 100 ms.

  The basic operation 5 having the sequence number 5 is a sequence for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position, as in the basic operation 1. The difference from the basic operation 1 is that the step transition condition is not the step count F but the front exposure position sensor E15b changes from a non-detection state (OFF state) to a detection state (ON state), and a 3 ms cycle at step 3. That is, the point is driven toward the front exposure position by 19 pulses. Hereinafter, the front exposure position sensor E15b is also simply referred to as "sensor B".

  The basic operation 5 is also used as accessory data registered in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) to confirm the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 when the power is turned on.

  The basic operation 6 having the sequence number 6 is a sequence for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position as in the basic operation 2. The difference from the basic operation 2 is that the step transition condition is not the step count F, but the front standby position sensor E15a changes from a non-detection state (OFF state) to a detection state (ON state), and a 3 ms cycle at step 3. It is a point for driving by 20 pulses toward the front standby position. Hereinafter, the front standby position sensor E15a is also simply referred to as "sensor A".

  The basic operation 6 is also used as accessory data registered in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) to confirm the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 when the power is turned on.

  The basic operation 7 having the sequence number 7 is a sequence for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position similarly to the basic operation 4. The difference from the basic operation 4 is that the step transition condition is not the step count R counting condition.

  The basic operation 7 is also used as accessory data registered in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process (see FIG. 97) to confirm the operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 when the power is turned on.

  The production operation 1 having the sequence number 8 vibrates the front screen mechanism E1 to a position corresponding to the step count F = 18. In the production operation 2 having the sequence number 9, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the position corresponding to the step count F = 50.

  In step 3 of the rendering operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is excited to be stopped for 65000 ms at a position corresponding to the step count F = 50, but during the actual operation, the rendering operation 2 is performed by the player's operation or the like. It is supposed to be interrupted by another effect that is executed.

  For this reason, after step 4, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front in order to prevent the deterioration over time due to continued excitation of the motor A when step 3 of the rendering operation 2 is not interrupted. It is set to return to the standby position, that is, the stationary position.

  In the production operation 3 having the sequence number 10, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 72 and stopped. In the production operation 4 having the sequence number 11, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 92 and stopped.

  In the production operation 5 having the sequence number 12, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 100 and stopped. The effect of dropping the reel screen mechanism F1 by the effect operations 3, 4, and 5 is realized by continuously executing the effect operations 3 and 4 or the effect operations 3 and 5.

  In the step 5 of the effect operation 3, the step 3 of the effect operation 4 and the step 4 of the effect operation 5 as well, the reel screen mechanism F1 is configured to be excited and stopped for 65000 ms at the non-rest position where the reel screen mechanism F1 is half exposed. Similar to step 3, the subsequent steps are set to prevent the aging deterioration of the motor B from progressing.

  In the production operation 6 having the sequence number 13, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a position corresponding to the step count R = 106 and stopped. In the production operation 6, the steps before step 7 are set so that the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at a position corresponding to the step count R = 106 regardless of the position of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Even in step 7 of the effect operation 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 is stopped to be excited for 65000 ms at the non-stationary position. However, as in step 3 of the effect operation 2, the subsequent steps show that the motor B has deteriorated over time. It is set to prevent the progress.

  In the production operation 7 having the sequence number 14, after moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the position corresponding to the step count R = 103, the reel screen mechanism F1 is vibrated once to the position corresponding to the step count R = 93, and the step count R is reached. Return to the position corresponding to 103.

  In the production operation 8 having the sequence number 15, after moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to a position corresponding to the step count R = 103 at a speed different from that of the production operation 7, the step count R is made at a speed different from that of the production operation 7. = 93 is oscillated once to a position corresponding to = 93 and returned to a position corresponding to step count R = 103.

  In the step 9 of the effect operation 7 and the step 7 of the effect operation 8, the reel screen mechanism F1 is excited and stopped at the non-stationary position for 65000 ms. However, like step 3 of the effect operation 2, the subsequent steps are , Is set to prevent the deterioration of the motor B over time. The production operation 9 having the sequence number 16 moves the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position at a low speed.

  In the accessory data table, the sequence of the basic operation 1 of sequence number 1 to the basic operation 7 of sequence number 7 is the accessory activation test executed when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on, and the game state is changed. This is a sequence used when the screen to be displayed is changed when shifting from the normal state to the bonus game, the CT or the ART, that is, the production operation 1 of sequence number 8 to the production operation 9 of sequence number 16. Is a sequence selected by the effect content and effect data determined in the effect content determination process (see FIG. 107).

  In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes drive control means for controlling the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 based on each step of the operation represented by the accessory data table. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 has a stationary position that can be stopped without exciting the motor A and an excitation stop position that can be stopped by exciting the motor A. In the front screen mechanism E1, the stationary position corresponds to the front exposure position and the front standby position, and the excitation stop position can be set to any position within the movable range excluding the front exposure position and the front standby position.

  Further, the reel screen mechanism F1 has a stationary position that can be stopped without exciting the motor B, and an excitation stop position that can be stopped by exciting the motor B. In the reel screen mechanism F1, the stationary position corresponds to the reel exposure position and the reel standby position, and the excitation stop position can be set to any position within the movable range excluding the reel exposure position and the reel standby position.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 96.

<Main operation process of pachi-slot controlled by main CPU>
First, the procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 80 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

  First, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup was performed normally or the setting was changed appropriately, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data must be erased for each unit game (game).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, the input of the medal sensor 46 and the start switch 64 is checked.

  Then, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (FIG. 42, FIG. 43) corresponding to the current game state, and randomly selects a winning combination to be determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” have been determined as internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” is determined as an internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

  Following the processing of S6, or if it is determined in S5 that the winning combination "F_BB1" or "F_BB2" has not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 93 then continues by state, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 81. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Then, the main CPU 93 performs main side navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets navigation data (0 or a value of 1 to 11) according to the current gaming state and internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub control board 72. Further, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Then, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop initialization processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S9). In this processing, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

  Then, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates start command data and sends it to the sub control board 72. The start command data includes a sub flag (see FIG. 53) and various kinds of information necessary for effects such as a game state.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 ms), and thereafter, Controlled to maintain a constant speed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop control processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 (S12). In this process, the reel stop control information determined in S9 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R, respectively. It

  Then, the main CPU 93 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, depending on the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of re-playing. Give profit. Then, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates data of the winning operation command and sends it to the sub control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the activated line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 93 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls the operation and the end of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95 (S16).
In this process, the main CPU 93 performs control to shift the RT game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes a CZ / ART end time process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 carries out the CZ pull-back lottery. When the CZ / ART end time process is performed, the main CPU 93 determines that one game (unit game) is completed and returns the process to S2.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the control processing for each state will be described with reference to FIG. 81. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S31). If it is in the RT4 game state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S32).

  Subsequent to the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). When the game is in the normal game state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a normal start process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 (S34), and ends the state-based control process.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the current gaming state is CZ (S35). When in CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a CZ in-starting process (S36), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 84, and ends the state-based control process.

  On the other hand, when the current game state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the current game state is the normal ART (S37). If it is in the normal ART (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 88, and ends the state-based control process.

  On the other hand, when the current game state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current game state is CT (S39). When it is in CT (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the in-CT start process described later with reference to FIG. 89 (S40), and ends the state-based control process.

  On the other hand, when the current game state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the current game state is the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the during-BB start process described later in FIG. 90 (S42), and ends the state-based control process.

  On the other hand, when the current game state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 93 performs other processing (S43), and ends the state-based control processing. For example, the main CPU 93 performs processing according to the preparation when the ART is being prepared.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the time to start CT (S50). When it is the time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the in-CT flag conversion table lottery table (FIG. 68), and randomly selects and sets the table number used in the flag conversion lottery in CT. Yes (S51).

  Following the processing of S51, or if it is not the time to start CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, set the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 77), and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART , The flag conversion lottery table during ART is set (FIG. 62), and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the flag conversion lottery table during CT is set (FIG. 69).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 carries out a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). When the flag conversion lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently carries out a flag conversion process (S55). In this processing, for example, when the winning combination "F_1 probable Chilelip" is determined as an internal winning combination, the winning combination "F_1 probable Chilelip" is treated as a winning combination "three consecutive Chilelips".

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 game state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the general game state (non-ART) is not notified. judge. When the current game state is not in ART (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), subsequently sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and sets the flag. The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current game state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the flag conversion process.

  If the flag conversion lottery is not won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the flag maintaining process (S59), and ends the flag conversion process. In the flag maintaining process, for example, when the winning combination “F_1 definite relipping” is determined as an internal winning combination, the winning combination “F_1 definite relipping” is treated as a winning combination “replay”.

<Normal start processing>
Next, the normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal start processing, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 56 (A), and performs the CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ lottery is won (S62). If the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the type of CZ that was won for the next game (S63), and subsequently sets the CZ game number counter to a value corresponding to the type of CZ that was won. Yes (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter for counting the duration of CZ, and when CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

  Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability random determination table of FIG. The lottery state of the CZ lottery is selected based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal start process is terminated.

<Processing during CZ start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the processing at the time of CZ start will be described. In the CZ start processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If it is during CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a CZ1 (CZ2) in-process described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86 (S72), and ends the CZ-in-start process.

  On the other hand, when it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a CZ1 (CZ2) in-process described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86 (S74), and ends the CZ-in-start process. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in rank (mode or point) with different expectation of winning the ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing in CZ1 (CZ2) by one processing.

  On the other hand, when it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a CZ3 in-process described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S75), and ends the CZ-in-start process.

<Treatment during CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S82 when it is the first half (YES), and shifts the processing to S91 of FIG. 86 when it is not the first half (is the second half) (NO).

  In the case of the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ1 middle mode up lottery table (FIG. 57) and performs the mode up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 58), and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a freeze is won in the lottery in S82 (S84). If the player has won the freeze (YES), the main CPU 93 performs freeze processing for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the ART set number and the CT set number (S85). In this processing, the main CPU 93 further determines and sets the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). When the freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and finishes processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by 1 (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). When the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process.

  On the other hand, if the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process. To do.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 86, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, the ART lottery table during CZ (FIGS. 59A and 59B) is referred to, and the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not this ART lottery is won (S93).

  When winning the ART lottery (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and randomly draws the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). , And set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or if the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 93 sets “4” to the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and sets “3” to the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. ”Is set.

  Following the processing of S95, or if it is not the one game in the latter half of the game in S91 (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ-ART ART lottery table (FIG. 59 (C)), and makes an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery is won (S97). If this ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the ART set number, and randomly draws the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). And set (S98).

  Following the processing of S98, or if the ART lottery has not been won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 93 decrements the CZ game number counter (latter half) by 1 (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). When the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and finishes processing during CZ1 (CZ2). . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets a CZ failure time (S103), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing.

<Treatment during CZ3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the CZ3 intermediate processing will be described. In the CZ3 intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ during ART lottery table (FIG. 60 (D)), performs the ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and wins this ART lottery? It is determined whether or not (S122).

  When winning the ART lottery (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the freeze is won in the ART lottery in S121 (S124). When the player has won the freeze (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game (S125).

  Subsequent to the processing of S125, or if the freeze is not won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently lots the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S127), and finishes processing during CZ3.

  On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). When the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ3 mid-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the ART set number and also randomly selects and sets the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (A)). (S130). Then, the main CPU 93 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and finishes processing during CZ3.

<Normal start-up processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the processing at the start during the normal ART will be described. In the normal ART start time process, the main CPU 93 first increments the ART continuous game number counter by 1 (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games in which the normal ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter for counting the number of games in which the normal ART can be continued is provided. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuing game number counter with the value of the ART ending game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter, sets the ART playing state. finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 65), performs the CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not this CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). When winning the CT lottery (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and subsequently, the type of the next game is won. CT is set (S145).

  Following the processing of S145, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 63 (B)), and refers to the ART continuous game number counter. Based on the value of, the ART level is randomly selected and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal ART medium / high probability random determination table (FIG. 64), and randomly selects and sets the transfer destination CT random determination state based on the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination (S147). .

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal lottery lottery table during the ART (FIG. 66), performs the lottery lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won. The determination is made (S149). When the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART number game for ending ART (S150).

  Following the processing of S150, or in the case where the additional lottery has not been won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently causes the value of the ART continuing game number counter to reach the value of the ART ending game number counter. It is determined whether or not (S151). When the value of the ART continuing game number counter has not reached the value of the ART ending game number counter (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the normal ART start time process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter (YES), the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of ART sets (S152), and then, when the ART ends. The process is set (S153), and the process at the start during normal ART is completed.

<Processing at the start during CT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the processing at the start during CT will be described. In the start process during CT, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 70), performs additional lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and adds to this additional lottery. It is determined whether or not the winning is won (S162).

  When the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART number game for ending ART (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chili lip” is won during the same CT is increased, the additional amount per one time is increased.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelip” (that is, whether or not the winning combination is converted into the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 82) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination “three consecutive chilirip” (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and ends the processing during start during CT. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CT start processing.

  In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the CT number of sets extra lottery table (FIG. 71), and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. The additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery of this CT set number has been won (S167). When the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and finishes the process during start during CT.

  On the other hand, when the additional lottery of the CT set number has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). When the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CT start processing.

  When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CT set number is 1 or more (S172). When the CT set number is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the CT game number counter to 8 (S173), and ends the CT start process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 ends CT, sets normal ART in the next game (S174), and ends the start processing during CT.

<Processing during BB start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the processing at the time of BB start will be described. In the BB start process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus bonus ART game number addition lottery table (FIG. 74), and performs the addition lottery item of the ART game based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). When the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB start process.

  On the other hand, when the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART game number for ending ART (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). When the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 93 ends the BB start processing. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the BB start processing.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the reel stop initialization process will be described. In the reel stop initialization process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to a spinning cylinder stop initialization table (not shown), and acquires a spinning cylinder stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the turning cylinder stop initialization table, and acquires each information based on the turning cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 93 obtains various information associated with the number for turning cylinder stop, such as determination data by pressing order.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initialization process. The stop button non-operation counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control processing>
Subsequently, the reel stop control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 17S. When determining that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 93 stores a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (Fig. (Not shown) and (S202). That is, the main CPU 93 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressed order storage area based on the type and order of the pressed stop button. Manage the order of stop operations (push order).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (( S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). In this sliding frame number determination process, the number of sliding frames defined at the stop start position is determined based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the spinning cylinder stop initialization table based on the internal winning combination. Processing.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. Generation processing is executed (S167). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 95 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position in which any one of the predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces is added to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the reel rotation stops Is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process (S210). In this symbol code storing process, the symbol code of the checking symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the spinning reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing (S212). In this control changing process, the stop information group used to stop the reels is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not the signal is no longer output from the stop switch 17S.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority storage process (S216) and a process of step S201. In this attraction-in priority storage processing, the attraction-in priority rankings of all the symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R are determined. On the other hand, when the stop button non-operation counter is determined to be 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently proceeds from the BB middle payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state, to the winning determination medal payout process (S13 in FIG. 80). The payout number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB medium payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). When the BB medium payout number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is ended, while when the BB medium payout number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 continues. Processing at the end of the bonus is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag to ON.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus lottery CT random determination table (FIG. 75) to perform the bonus lottery CT random determination (S225), and determines whether or not the CT random determination has been won (S226). In the case of winning the CT lottery, the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the CT set number (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets and 1 is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

  Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs the BB check process. finish.

  On the other hand, if neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal medium / high probability random determination table (FIG. 55 (B)), and randomly determines and sets the random determination state of CZ (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  Further, when it is not in the bonus state in S221 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of BB (C_BB1, 2,) is displayed (S232). When the combination of symbols BB is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of symbols BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the bonus type random determination table (FIG. 73), and randomly selects and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs bonus start time processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 93 performs various processes such as starting a bonus operation and setting a bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT5 gaming state (S241). When in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 terminates the RT check processing, while when not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 continues in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  When it is in the RT0 game state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell crevice" is displayed (S243). When the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check processing, while when the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 Then, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT1 gaming state flag, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Then, the RT check process is terminated (S247).

  On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eyes" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the RT1 gaming state has passed 20 games (S248). If 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check processing, while if 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 93 turns off the RT1 gaming state flag and RT1 The game state is shifted to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When in the RT2 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (S251). When "RT3 shift rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process, while when "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 determines Then, the RT3 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned off, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 shift lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT3 gaming state flag, and from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. The state is shifted to the state (S263), and the RT check process is ended.

  On the other hand, if neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. Yes (S264). When "RT4 transition rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check processing, while when "RT4 transition rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 determines that Then, the RT4 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned OFF, and the RT3 gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check processing, while if the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 93 determines the CT set number. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

  When the CT set number is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the CT set number is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the normal game to the next game, sets the ART end game number counter to a predetermined value (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 game state in S261 (NO), it is in the RT4 game state, so the main CPU 93 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 shift lip". It is determined whether or not (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 shift rep" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the RT check process, while "bell spill" or "RT2 shift rep" is displayed. When displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT4 gaming state flag, shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs RT check processing. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the CZ / ART end processing will be described. In the CZ / ART end time process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is CZ failure or ART end time (S281). If neither CZ failure nor ART termination (NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the CZ / ART termination processing, while CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 56 (B)), and performs the CZ pullback lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pullback lottery is won (S283).

  When the draw-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the type of CZ that was won in the next game (S284), and sets a value corresponding to the type of CZ that was won in the CZ game number counter. Then (S285), the CZ / ART end processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the draw-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the normal game state to the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the normal medium / high probability random determination table (FIG. 55 (B)), and randomly selects and sets the random determination state of CZ (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 110.

<Accessory control task>
FIG. 97 shows a processing flow of the accessory control task executed by the sub CPU 102.

  Upon activation, the sub CPU 102 clears the step count F and the step count R to 0, and sets an accessory stop flag that indicates whether or not the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is prohibited to OFF. The process is executed (S301).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a character product activation test character product data registration process (S302). In the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 moves the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position, and detects the detection results of the front standby position sensor E15a and the front exposure position sensor E15b. Based on this, the step count F is aligned with the position of the front screen mechanism E1.

  Further, in the accessory booting test accessory data registration processing, the sub CPU 102 moves the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position, and based on the detection result of the reel standby position sensor F19, the step is performed. The count R is aligned with the position of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  Further, in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 transmits accessory data (see FIG. 79) representing the basic operation 1 of sequence number 1 for moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position as the initial position. It is stored in the sub RAM 103.

  Further, in the accessory activation test accessory data registration process, the sub CPU 102 transmits accessory data (see FIG. 79) representing the basic operation 4 of sequence number 4 for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position as the initial position. It is stored in the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the accessory data is stored in the sub RAM 103 and the accessory stop flag is OFF (S303). When it is determined that the accessory data is stored in the sub RAM 103 and the accessory stop flag is OFF (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the accessory operation sequence registration process described with reference to FIG. 98. Yes (S304).

  When it is determined that the accessory data is not stored in the sub RAM 103 or the accessory stop flag is not OFF (NO), or after the processing of step S304 is executed, the sub CPU 102 refers to FIG. 99. The accessory control process described is executed (S305). Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for 1 ms (S306), and returns the accessory control task to step S303.

  Specifically, the processing of waiting for 1 ms is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time from 1 ms to steps S303 to S305 (for example, if the processing time of S303 to S305 is 0.3 ms, waiting for 1 ms is 0. Wait 7 ms). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the accessory control task at a cycle of 1 ms.

<Registration process of character product operation sequence>
FIG. 98 shows a flow of the accessory action sequence registration processing executed by the accessory control task whose processing flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the movable screen position determination process described with reference to FIG. 100 (S310). Next, the sub CPU 102 includes effect data (step number, pulse width, pulse number) included in the sequence data associated with the character data stored in the sub RAM 103 by the character data table shown in FIG. 79. , And information regarding the motor control directions of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 and the step transition) are stored as operation data in the sequence data storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 (S311).

  Here, when the operation data of the sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area, if the operation data of the other sequence data is already stored, the sub CPU 102 stores the sequence data of the sequence data to be registered in the sequence data storage area. The step number of the operation data and the step number of the operation data of the registered sequence data are adjusted to register the sequence data in the sequence data storage area.

  For example, when performing the operation represented by the sequence data to be newly registered after the operation represented by the registered sequence data, a new operation is added so as to follow the step number of the last operation data of the registered sequence data. The step number of each operation data of the sequence data to be registered is adjusted and the sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area.

  When executing the operation represented by the newly registered sequence data before the operation represented by the registered sequence data, the sub CPU 102 follows the step number of the last operation data of the newly registered sequence data. As described above, the effect data is registered in the sequence data storage area by adjusting the step number of each operation data of the registered sequence data.

  Further, the sub CPU waits for the registered sequence data to be one of the rendering operations, the newly registered sequence data to be one of the other rendering operations, or the reel screen mechanism F1 or the front screen mechanism E1. When the accessory data to be moved to the position is registered, the registered sequence data is canceled and the effect data of the newly registered sequence data is registered in the sequence data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area from step 1, and registers the acquired operation data in the motor driver of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 (S312), The accessory motion sequence registration processing ends. The sub CPU 102 controls the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 based on the operation data registered in the motor driver by another task (not shown) different from the accessory control task.

  Specifically, based on the operation data registered in the motor driver, for example, if the motor control direction of the drive motor F21 is “+”, the pulse width is 4 ms, and the number of pulses is 10, A of the drive motor F21 is determined. The (and opposite phase A bar) phase is excited for 2 ms, the B (and opposite phase B bar) phase is excited for 2 ms, and the pulse number is decremented by 1. Then, excitation of the A and B phases is repeated until the number of pulses becomes zero. If the motor control direction is the "-" direction, the A and B phases are excited in the opposite excitation sequence, and if the motor control direction is "H", the pulse width time A (and the opposite phase Both A-bar) and B- (and B-bar of opposite phase) phases are excited.

<Accessory control processing>
FIG. 99 shows the flow of the accessory action sequence registration processing executed by the accessory control task whose processing flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operating states of the drive motor F21 (motor A) and the drive motor E25 (motor B), that is, the motor operating state from the motor driver (S320).

  The motor operating state is whether or not the motor is operating, the type of motor in operation (motor A or motor B), pulse count (absolute value) in operation data, motor direction in operation (“+”, “ -"," H "), pulse time (ms), pulse time count (ms), and when registered in the motor driver of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25, the motor type and the motor excitation in the motor direction. The direction is set to the pulse count, the number of pulses, the pulse time to the pulse width, and the pulse time count to 0.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a step count update process for updating the step count F and the step count R (S321). In the step count updating process, the sub CPU 102 updates based on the pulse count of the motor operating state acquired in step S320.

  For example, when the drive motor F21 (motor A) is operating and the pulse count is updated from "6" to "5", the sub CPU 102 changes the step count F to "F" when the motor direction is "+". When 1 is added and the motor direction is "-", 1 is subtracted from the step count F.

  Specifically, when the motor direction is "-", the pulse time is 10 ms, and the pulse count is 20 in the motor A driver, the B (and B-phase of the reverse phase) phase of the motor A is excited for 10 ms, and A ( When the reverse phase A bar) is excited for 10 ms, the pulse count is updated from "20" to "19".

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines that the operations of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 have ended, that is, whether or not the motor operation state acquired in step S321 indicates that the operation has ended (S322).

  If it is determined that the motor operating state represents the end of operation (YES), the sub CPU 102 updates the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area to the next step (S323). For example, the sub CPU 102 updates the data pointer of the sequence data storage area for the executed operation data to the position of the next operation data (next step).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is operation data in the sequence data storage area (indicated by the data pointer) (S324). The sub CPU 102 registers the end block (for example, “0xFFFFH”) next to the last operation data when updating the sequence data storage area. Therefore, if the end block is registered in the sequence data storage area, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no operation data in the sequence data storage area.

  When it is determined that there is no motion data in the sequence data storage area (it is an end block) (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the accessory motion sequence registration process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is motion data in the sequence data storage area (it is not an end block) (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the motion data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area and acquires it. The operation data is registered in the motor driver (S325).

  When it is determined in step S322 that the motor operating state does not represent the end of operation (YES), or after the process of step S325 is performed, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub CPUs 102 to detect the sensors A to C (that is, the front standby position sensor E15a, The states of the front exposure position sensor E15b and the reel standby position sensor F19) are acquired (S326).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the transfer condition of the operation data from the sequence data storage area (S327). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the acquired transition condition is set (S328). Here, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the setting (see FIG. 79) of the information regarding the step transition of the operation data is set to “1”.

  When it is determined that the transition condition is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a step transition determination process of determining whether or not the transition condition is satisfied (S329). For example, referring to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, the sub CPU 102 determines that the step count R is 72 or more in step 3 when performing the effect operation 3 having the sequence number 10. For example, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and if the step count R is not 72 or more, it is determined that the transition condition is not satisfied.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the transition condition is satisfied as a result of the step transition determination process (S330). When determining that the shift condition is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 updates the sequence data storage area so as to shift to the step indicated by the shift destination (S331).

  For example, referring to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the transition condition is satisfied when executing the effect operation 3 having the sequence number of 10, , The sequence data storage area is updated so that the operation data in step 5 comes to the head of the sequence data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation data of the sequence data registered in the sequence data storage area, and registers the acquired operation data in the motor driver of the drive motor F21 and the drive motor E25 (S332).

  When it is determined in step S328 that the transition condition is not set (NO), when it is determined in step S330 that the transition condition is not satisfied (NO), or after performing the process of step S332, The CPU 102 determines whether or not the detection state of any of the sensors A to C has changed (S333).

  When it is desired to determine that there is no change in any of the detection states of the sensors A to C, the sub CPU 102 ends the accessory action sequence registration process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection state of any of the sensors A to C has changed, the sub CPU 102 executes a step count correction process of correcting the step count F or the step count R (S334), and the accessory The operation sequence registration process ends.

  In the step count correction process, the sub CPU 102 sets the step count F to “19” when the item of the motor A is “+” and the sensor A changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light reception). to correct. The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to “23” when the item of the motor A is “−” and the sensor A changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light shielding).

  The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to “192” when the item of the motor A is “+” and the sensor B changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light shielding). The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count F to “188” when the item of the motor A is “−” and the sensor B changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light reception).

  The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count R to “3” when the item of the motor B is “+” and the sensor C changes from the detection state (light shielding) to the non-detection state (light reception). . The sub CPU 102 corrects the step count R to “2” when the item of the motor B is “−” and the sensor C changes from the non-detection state (light reception) to the detection state (light shielding).

<Movable screen position determination processing>
FIG. 100 shows the flow of the movable screen position determination process executed in the accessory action sequence registration process shown in FIG. 98.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command is received (S350). When it is determined that the start command is not received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the movable screen position determination process.

  When it is determined that the start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 specifies the control target motor from the motor A and the motor B from the operation data stored in the sequence data storage area (S351). Here, the sub CPU 102 specifies the motor whose motor control direction of the operation data is "+", "-", or "H".

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a movable screen interference determination process that determines whether both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are exposed (S352).

  In the movable screen interference determination process, the sub CPU 102 detects the current position of the movable screen driven by a motor different from the controlled motor based on the detection states of the sensors A to C, the step count F, and the step count R. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the accessory position determination means.

  For example, referring to the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, when the effect operation 3 of sequence number 10 is executed, the motor B that drives the reel screen mechanism F1 is the control target motor, and therefore the front screen. The mechanism E1 needs to be in the front standby position.

  At this time, the sub CPU 102 determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position when the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) or when the step count F is not 21 or less, and the front screen is not detected. It is determined that the position of the mechanism E1 is an F screen interference that is an error. In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes the accessory position error detection means.

  Similarly, when the basic operation 5 of the sequence number 5 is executed, the motor A that drives the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a control target motor, so the reel screen mechanism F1 needs to be at the reel standby position.

  At this time, the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when the sensor C is in the non-detection state (light reception) or when the step count R is not 3 or less, and the reel screen is not displayed. It is determined that the position of the mechanism F1 is an R screen interference that is an error.

  After executing the processing of step S352, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is F screen interference (S353). When it is determined that there is F screen interference (YES), the sub CPU 102 moves the basic operation 2 of sequence number 2 in the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, that is, the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position. The operation data for this is registered at the beginning of the sequence storage area (S354), and 1 is added to the accessory error count (S355).

  In addition, in order to move the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position, the basic operation 2 of the sequence number 2 of the accessory data table is used, but the basic operation 6 of the sequence number 6 is used instead of the sequence number 2. Good.

  The accessory error count indicates the number of times an error relating to the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is continuously detected, and is cleared to 0 when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off or by the watchdog timer. To be done.

  When it is determined that it is not F screen interference (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is R screen interference (S356). When it is determined that there is R screen interference (YES), the sub CPU 102 moves the basic operation 4 of sequence number 4 of the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, that is, the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position. The operation data for this is registered at the beginning of the sequence storage area (S357), and 1 is added to the accessory error count (S358).

  In addition, in order to move the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position, the basic operation 4 of sequence number 4 in the accessory data table is used, but the basic operation 6 of sequence number 6 is used instead of the sequence number 4. Good.

  When it is determined that it is not the R screen interference (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 at the start of the unit game. The process is executed (S359).

  In the game start screen position determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an error in the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 if the sensor C is in the non-detection state when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position due to the effect. To do.

  If the sensor A is in the non-detection state or the sensor B is in the detection state when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position due to the effect, the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1. .

  Further, the sub CPU 102, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position due to the effect, the sensor A is in the non-detection state, or the sensor B is in the detection state, or If the sensor C is in the non-detection state, it is determined that there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1.

  After executing the game start screen position determination processing in step S359, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an error in the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1, that is, whether or not there is a position abnormality (S360). .

  When determining that there is a position abnormality, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the accessory error count (S361). When determining that there is no position abnormality, the sub CPU 102 clears the accessory error count to 0 (S362), and ends the movable screen position determination process.

  After executing the processing of step S355, S358, or S361, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory error count is 10 or more (S363). When determining that the accessory error count is not 10 or more, the sub CPU 102 ends the movable screen position determination process.

  When determining that the accessory error count is 10 or more, the sub CPU 102 executes an error registration process (S364). In the error registration process, the sub CPU 102 registers the error type “YAKUMONO STOP” and the date and time of occurrence (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) in the error information history storage area of the SRAM constituting the sub RAM 103 without displaying the error screen. .

  As a result, the clerk (clerk) can select the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 from the error information history screen that can be displayed on the image display device 201a when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not moving. You can confirm that an error has occurred regarding the position of.

  After executing the processing of step S364, the sub CPU 102 sets the accessory stop flag to ON, and ends the movable screen position determination processing.

<Main task>
FIG. 101 shows a processing flow of a main task executed by the sub CPU 102. The sub CPU 102 executes VSYNC interrupt initialization processing at the time of startup (S370).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S371). In addition, in the present embodiment, since the sub CPU 102 displays the video at 30 fps, the VSYNC interrupt is generated at a cycle of 33 ms. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the main task in a 33 ms cycle.

  When the VSYNC interrupt occurs, the sub CPU 102 executes the chance button process described with reference to FIG. 102 (S372). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the navigation position designation process described with reference to FIG. 104 (S373).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes drawing processing for the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a (S374). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the error display process described with reference to FIG. 103 (S375), and returns the main task to step S371. In this way, the sub CPU 102 that executes the main task constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit 100 and the image display device 201a.

<Chance button processing>
FIG. 102 shows a flow of chance button processing executed by the main task whose processing flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the chance button LED 34 is lit (S380). When determining that the chance button LED 34 is lighting (YES), the sub CPU 102 detects that the chance button 33 is pressed by the chance switch 35, inserts a medal, or presses the MAX bet button 11. It is determined whether or not a medal insertion command indicating that there has been is received from the main control circuit 91 (S381).

  If it is determined that the chance button 35 has not been detected by the chance switch 35 and the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the chance button process.

  When it is determined that the chance button 35 is detected by the chance switch 35 or the medal insertion command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED board 82 to turn off the chance button LED 34 ( S382).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes effect switching processing (S383), and ends the chance button processing. In the effect switching process, the sub CPU 102 determines an effect based on conditions such as a sub flag and a game state.

  For example, the sub CPU 102 displays the number of additional games on the display unit 100 or the like when the addition is determined during the ART, and the chance button 33 is pressed when the bonus is won during the normal operation or during the ART. After that, the effect is switched to an effect between the bonus flags.

  If it is determined in step S380 that the chance button LED 34 is not lit (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the chance button effect triggered by the depression of the chance button 33 has been selected (S384).

  The chance button effect is selected when the chance button lighting lottery is won in the effect lottery process executed by the sub CPU 102 at the time of receiving the start command and the winning command.

  When it is determined in step S384 that the chance button effect has not been selected (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the chance button process. On the other hand, when determining that the chance button effect has been selected (YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED board 82 to turn on the chance button LED 34 (S385).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the chance button effect (S386), and ends the chance button process. For example, in the chance button effect, the sub CPU 102 causes a video image imitating the shape of the chance button 33 to be displayed in a substantially central area of the display area of the display unit 100.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 to display an image corresponding to the effect on the display unit 100 and an image corresponding to the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation unit such as the chance button 33. And a production operation display means for displaying.

<Error display processing>
FIG. 103 shows a flow of error display processing executed by the main task shown in FIG. 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an error is being displayed (S400). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an error image indicating an error relating to the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  When it is determined that the error is not being displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether an error has occurred (S401). Specifically, whether the sub CPU 102 receives an error command indicating an error detected by the main control board 71 from the main control board 71 (see FIG. 107) or whether the sub control board 72 detects an error. To judge.

  The error command is a process executed by the main CPU 93. For example, when a medal clogging error detected by the medal sensor 46, a medal backward error, a payout medal empty detected by the hopper device 43, and a hopper jam occur. This is the command to be sent.

  When determining that an error has occurred (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the states of the sensors A to C (S402). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and the sensor B is in the detection state (light shielding) (S403).

  When it is determined that the sensor A is not in the non-detection state (light reception) or the sensor B is not in the detection state (light shielding) (NO), the sub CPU 102 causes the sensor A to be in the non-detection state (light reception), and It is determined whether or not the sensor B is in the non-detection state (light reception) (S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception) and the sensor B is in the detection state (light shielding) (YES), or in step S404, the sensor A is in the non-detection state (light reception). ) And the sensor B is in the non-detection state (light reception), the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. An error image for the F screen, which is an error image for the front screen mechanism E1 as shown in FIG. 112, is output from the ROM cartridge substrate 76 to the projector mechanism B2 (S405), and the error display process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S404 that the sensor A is not in the non-detection state (light reception) or the sensor B is not in the non-detection state (light reception) (NO), the sub CPU 102 causes the sensor C to be in the non-detection state (light reception). It is determined whether or not (S406).

  When it is determined that the sensor C is in the non-detection state (light reception) (YES), since the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1, the sub CPU 102 causes the ROM cartridge board to operate. The R screen error image, which is an error image for the reel screen mechanism F1 as shown in FIG. 113, is output from the projector mechanism B2 to the projector mechanism B2 (S407), and the error display processing is ended.

  When it is determined that the sensor C is not in the non-detection state (light reception) (NO), since the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, the sub CPU 102 causes the ROM cartridge board 76 to operate. The output image for W screen, which is the error image for the fixed screen mechanism D as shown in FIG. 114, is output to the projector mechanism B2 (S408), and the error display process is ended. That is, the ROM cartridge board 76 constitutes an error image storage means for storing the error images shown in FIGS. 112 to 114.

  If it is determined in step S400 that an error is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the error is canceled or whether the error display termination condition is satisfied (S409).

  The sub CPU 102 receives an error command from the main control board 71 indicating that the error detected by the main control board 71 has been released, when the error detected by the sub control board 72 has been resolved, or when the error is resolved. If the door key reset operation is performed after the operation is performed, it is determined that the error is released.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 determines that the error display ending condition is satisfied when the time measured by the timer has passed the error display time for the error of the sub control board 72 for which the display time is set.

  When it is determined that the error is not released and the error display termination condition is not satisfied (NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the error display process. When it is determined that the error is canceled or the condition for ending the error display is satisfied (YES), the sub CPU 102 erases the error image (S410) and ends the error display process. That is, in step S410, the sub CPU 102 causes the display unit 100 to display the image before the error occurs.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 that executes the error display process identifies the screen mechanism on which the image output by the display unit 100 is displayed from the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. The specifying means and the error display means for displaying an error image representing the detected error on one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 when the error is detected are configured. To do.

  Further, in the error display process, when an error image representing an error relating to the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, the sub CPU 102 causes the fixed screen mechanism D, An image display device 201a, which is a non-movable sub-display device having a display area narrower than that of either the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1, displays an error image as shown in FIG. You may

<Navi position specification processing>
FIG. 104 shows the flow of the navigation position designation processing executed by the main task whose processing flow is shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation represented by the operation order notification video indicating the operation order of the stop operation is being displayed, by determining whether the navigation data (see FIG. 78) included in the parameter of the start command is other than 0. A judgment is made (S430). When it is determined that the navigation is not being displayed (when the navigation data is 0) (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the navigation position designation processing.

  When the navigation data is other than 0 (when the navigation data is any of 1 to 11) (YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the screen output by the projector mechanism B2 on the fixed screen mechanism D in the W screen display. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S431).

  When it is determined that the W screen is not being displayed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the navigation position designation process. When it is determined that the W screen is being displayed (YES), the sub CPU 102 causes the reel screen mechanism F1 corresponding to the second display device to drop (“effect operation 3” or “effect operation” in the accessory data table). 4 ”) is being executed and it is determined whether or not the R screen is falling (S432).

  When it is determined that the R screen is not falling (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the first navigation position display instruction setting (S433), and ends the navigation position designation process. In the first navigation position display instruction setting, the sub CPU 102 sets the first display area included in the front surface (the reflection surface of the front reflection portion D1) of the fixed screen mechanism D corresponding to the first display device, as shown in FIG. Set to the navigation position.

  When it is determined that the R screen is falling (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs second navigation position display instruction setting (S434), and ends the navigation position designation process. In the second navigation position display instruction setting, as shown in FIG. 117, the sub CPU 102 sets the second display area included in the lower surface of the fixed screen mechanism D (reflection surface of the lower surface reflection portion D4) as the navigation position.

  The navigation displayed at the designated navigation position is the navigation corresponding to the sub-side navigation data set by the sub-side navigation control processing (see FIG. 109), which will be described later, in the first display area or the second display. Displayed in the area.

<LED control task>
FIG. 105 shows the processing flow of the LED control task executed by the sub CPU 102.

  Upon activation, the sub CPU 102 executes an LED control initialization process for initializing the lighting state of each LED of the LED group 75 (S450). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is LED data registered in the sub RAM 103 (S451).

  When determining that there is LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the LED data registration processing described with reference to FIG. 106 (S452). When it is determined that there is no LED data (NO), or after executing the processing of S452, the sub CPU 102 executes the LED control processing (S453).

  In the LED control processing, the sub CPU 102 performs output control of outputting the LED data registered in the LED data registration processing to the LED driver. For example, the sub CPU 102 performs an output control to output to the LED driver the LED data processed by the flashing or the color change pattern switching in the effect of the reel backlight.

  After executing the LED control process, the sub CPU 102 executes the LED control update process (S454). In the LED control update process, when the LEDs are dynamically turned on, the sub CPU 102 executes an update process such as switching of RGB and a soft timer for managing the turn-on / turn-off time of each LED. After executing the LED control processing, the sub CPU 102 stands by for 4 ms (S455) and returns the LED control task to step S451.

  Specifically, the processing of waiting for 4 ms is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the processing time from 1 ms to steps S451 to S452 (for example, if the processing time of S451 to S454 is 1.2 ms, waiting for 4 ms is 2. Wait 8 ms). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 processes the LED control task at a cycle of 4 ms.

<LED data registration processing>
FIG. 106 shows a flow of LED data registration processing executed by the LED control task shown in FIG. 105.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires LED data as light source data from the sub RAM 103 (S460). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes back lamp effect data for executing the back lamp effect (S461). The back lamp effect is executed by the reel back lamps for the reels 3L, 3C, 3R included in the LED group 75.

  When it is determined that there is back lamp effect data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires back lamp sequence data corresponding to the back lamp effect data from the LED data of the ROM cartridge board 76, and the back assigned to the sub RAM 103. It is registered in the lamp sequence storage area (S462).

  In the back lamp sequence data, a plurality of light emission patterns (combinations of lighting and extinguishing times), a light emission color, and a luminance that correspond to the reel back lamps of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R constitute a reel back lamp. It is stored in units of one full-color LED.

  When it is determined that there is no back lamp effect data (NO), or after executing the processing of step S462, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes effect LED data (S463).

  When it is determined that there is the effect LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the effect LED sequence data forming the effect LED data corresponding to the LED data from the ROM cartridge board 76, and the effect assigned to the sub RAM 103. It is registered in the LED sequence data storage area (S464).

  When it is determined that there is no effect LED data (NO), or after the processing of step S464 is performed, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes status LED data (S465). The state LED data represents the lighting state of the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b representing the game state.

  When it is determined that there is the status LED data (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the status LED data corresponding to the LED data from the ROM cartridge board 76, and registers it in the status LED storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 ( S466).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the LED data includes side lamp turn-off data (S467). If it is determined that there is side lamp turn-off data (YES), low brightness data is registered in the side lamp data in the status LED storage area (S468). That is, if there is data that turns off the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b, the sub CPU 102 converts the data that turns on the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b with low brightness.

  If it is determined in step S465 that there is no status LED data (NO), if it is determined in step S467 that there is no side lamp extinction data (NO), or after executing the processing of step S468, the sub CPU 102 It is determined whether or not there is a request to light the operation button LED provided on the operation button (S469).

  The operation button LEDs include LEDs provided on the MAX bet button 11 and the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R of the LED group 75, and the chance button LED 34, respectively.

  When it is determined that there is a lighting request (YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the operation button LED lighting data requested to be lit from the LED data and registers it in the operation button LED storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 ( (S470), the LED data registration processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S469 that there is no lighting request (NO), or after the processing of step S470 is performed, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a request to turn off the operation button LED (S471).

  When it is determined that the turn-off request is not issued (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the LED data registration process. When determining that there is a turn-off request (YES), the sub CPU 102 causes the operation button LED turn-off data for which turn-off is requested (any one LED arranged on the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, or 3). (All LEDs) are acquired and registered in the operation button LED storage area allocated to the sub RAM 103 (S472), and the LED data registration processing is ended. In this way, the sub CPU 102 that executes the LED data registration process constitutes a light source control unit that controls the lighting state of the light sources such as the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b.

<Production content determination processing>
FIG. 107 shows the flow of effect content determination processing executed in the main board communication task. First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S480).

  The medal insertion command is issued when the medal insertion / start check process (see FIG. 80) executed by the main CPU 93 detects a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 22 or when the operated MAX bet button 11 is pressed. This is a command to be transmitted when it is valid (the number of credits is 3 or more).

  When it is determined that the medal insertion command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the medal insertion command (S481), and the effect content. The determination process ends.

  If it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S482), and if it has been determined that a start command has been received (YES). The sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process described with reference to FIG. 108 (S483), and ends the effect content determination process.

  When it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command indicating that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has been received (S484). ).

  When it is determined that the reel rotation start command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel rotation start command reception time process for determining the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel rotation start command (S485). , Finishes the production content determination process. The reel rotation start command is a command transmitted within the reel rotation start processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the main CPU 93.

  When it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S486). When it is determined that the reel stop command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception time process that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the reel stop command (S487), and the effect content The determination process ends.

  When it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S488). When it is determined that the winning operation command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning operation command reception time process that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the winning operation command (S489), and the effect content The determination process ends.

  When it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether an error command has been received (S490). When it is determined that the error command is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an error command reception time process that determines the effect content according to the parameter included in the error command (S491), and performs the effect content determination process. finish.

<Processing when a start command is received>
FIG. 108 shows the flow of a start command reception process which is executed in the effect contents determination process shown in FIG. 107.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect lottery process for determining an effect, based on a predetermined lottery value and a random determination random number value (S500). In the effect lottery process, the accessory data used in the accessory control task (see FIG. 97) described above, the chance button effect of the chance button process (FIG. 102) executed in the main task (see FIG. 101), and the drawing process ( Various data (video, still image, type of screen to be used, etc.) related to video used in (not shown), LED data used in LED control task (see FIG. 105), sound control task (not shown) The sound data used in is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sub-side navigation control process described with reference to FIG. 109 (S501). The lottery value used in the effect lottery process is stored in the ROM cartridge board as a plurality of lottery values according to the sub-flag (see FIG. 53) and the gaming state. The random number for lottery is updated by the program every cycle (33 ms) in the main task.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the focus of the projector mechanism B2 needs to be changed based on the effect determined in the effect lottery process (S502). The sub CPU 102 switches the display target screen mechanism on which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed, depending on the game state.

  For example, when the gaming state is the general gaming state, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the front screen mechanism E1. The sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the fixed screen mechanism D when the game state is in the ART preparation.

  Further, when the gaming state is the bonus state, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed to the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the effect determined in the effect lottery process. Select one. When the gaming state is CT, the sub CPU 102 sets the screen mechanism to be displayed as the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The sub CPU 102 causes the projector mechanism B2 to output an image with the same focus for the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, so that the screen mechanism to be displayed is the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism. When switching between E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1, it is determined that the focus needs to be changed.

  The sub CPU 102 does not need to change the focus when the screen mechanism to be displayed does not change or when the screen mechanism to be displayed is switched between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. to decide.

  If it is determined that the focus need not be changed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process. When it is determined that the focus needs to be changed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory stop flag is ON (S503). The accessory stop flag is omitted because it has been described in the accessory control task (FIG. 97) and the movable screen position determination process (FIG. 100) described above.

  When it is determined that the accessory stop flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process. When the accessory stop flag is ON, the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be switched. Therefore, even if the effect requiring the focus change is determined, the sub CPU 102 Locks the current focus.

  When determining that the accessory stop flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus (S504), and ends the start command reception process.

  The projector mechanism B2 is preset with a focus (focal length) for the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1, and the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 requests the projector mechanism B2 to change the focus by issuing a control command for changing the focus to that set for the corresponding screen mechanism. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a focal length control unit that controls the focus on the projector mechanism B2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the focus of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are set to be the same, and the focus of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front reflection part D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be individually set to the focus, and the sub CPU 102 may be controllable to change the focus of all the screen mechanisms.

<Sub navigation control processing>
FIG. 109 shows a flow of sub-side navigation control processing executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 108.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the navigation data (see FIG. 78) included in the parameter of the start command is other than 0 (S510). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the navigation data is other than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub navigation data corresponding to the navigation data in the sub RAM 103 (S511), and ends the sub navigation control process.

  For example, when the navigation data is “4”, the sub CPU 102 sets data for informing the pressing order “left, middle, right” as the sub-side navigation data. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the navigation data is not 0, that is, the navigation data is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sub flag (see FIG. 53) is “2” or “3”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is "three consecutive dust A" or "three consecutive dust B" (S512).

  When it is determined that the sub flag is neither "three consecutive dust A" nor "three consecutive dust B" (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the sub-side navigation control process. When it is determined that the sub flag is “three consecutive dust A” or “three consecutive dust B” (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the sub side navigation data corresponding to the navigation data in the sub RAM 103 (S513), The sub-side navigation control processing ends.

  In step S513, the sub CPU 102 sets, as the sub-side navigation data, data for informing the pressing order “right, middle, left”. That is, the sub CPU 102 independently notifies the content of the stop operation on the sub side.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 responds to the navigation data when the added value is obtained (the navigation data is not 0) with respect to the sub flag corresponding to the internal winning combination in which the probability that the added value is obtained is relatively high. If the sub-side navigation data is set and no added value is obtained (navi data is 0), it is possible to make the internal winning combination that has a relatively high probability of obtaining added value recognize that the internal winning combination has been won. Set the navigation data on the sub side to notify the pressing order for displaying difficult combinations along the effective line.

  Note that the navigation notified by the sub-side navigation data is displayed in the first display area (see FIG. 116) or the second display area (see FIG. 117) set by the above-described navigation position designation processing (see FIG. 104). Is displayed.

  The sub CPU 102 determines navigation data (see FIG. 78) by the main CPU 93, and sends the navigation data to the sub CPU 102 by a start command from the main CPU 93, based on the navigation data by the sub-side navigation control process. A stop notification means for deciding a display area for displaying the set sub-side navigation data by the navigation position designation processing (FIG. 104) and executing the navigation is configured.

<Game record processing>
FIG. 110 shows a case where the start of recording game information is requested at the time of receiving a prize operation command (at the end of a unit game) or during the unit game (when the recording start button 216a shown in FIG. 30 is operated). It shows the flow of the game recording process executed in.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not recording is in progress (step S520). When it is determined that the recording is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the game recording process. When it is determined that recording is being performed (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a unit game is being performed (S521).

  When it is determined that the unit game is being played (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes one game recording process of recording information according to the progress state of the game in the sub RAM 103 (S522), and ends the game recording process. To do.

  When it is determined that the unit game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes one game end recording process for recording the game information regarding the unit game in the sub RAM 103 (S523), and ends the game recording process.

  Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a game information recording means. When the start of recording is requested during the unit game, the sub CPU 102 executes the game recording process and records information according to the progress state of the game, and when the winning operation command of the unit game is received, the game record is performed. Since the process is executed again and the game information regarding the unit game is recorded, the recording of the game information can be started during the unit game.

[Switching the display screen of the image display device]
Next, a method of switching the display screen of the image display device 201a of the touch panel unit 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (A) is a transition example of the display screen of the image display device 201a in the situation where game information is not being recorded, and FIG. 111 (B) is an image display device 201a in the situation where game information is being recorded. 7 is a transition example of the display screen of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 111A, when the game information is not being recorded, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) displays the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a on the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the menu screen. It is controlled so as to be transitable only between various display screens that can transit from 212. Specifically, the sub-control board 72, based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on the display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201b, the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, when the game information is not being recorded, the sub control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to be impossible. That is, in a situation where the game information is not being recorded, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the image display device 201a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111B, in the situation where the game information is being recorded, the sub control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the image display device 201a as the top screen 211, the menu screen 212 and the menu screen 212. In addition to various display screens that can be transitioned from, it is also possible to control transitions between the game information screens 213, 214, and 215. That is, the sub control board 72 controls so that not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be displayed based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201b. Thereby, in the situation where the game information is being recorded, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the image display device 201a.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (B), the order of transition of the display screen among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be allowed to transition directly to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be allowed to transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. Good.

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the top screen 211 cannot directly transit to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are only available through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to 215. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212, it is possible to transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215.

  Here, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the information indicating the result of the game that the player has a strong interest during the game, that is, the game history, is related information that is not related to the result of the game such as the payout arrangement and the volume adjustment. Display independently from. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the situation where the game information is being recorded, it is possible to transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to facilitate access to the information (game history) that the player desires to confirm in the situation where the game information is being recorded.

  On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 does not allow the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the swipe operation that is not in the menu display does not allow the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be treated as a hidden command in the situation where the game information is being recorded. For the player, his / her own knowledge of the pachi-slot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with less knowledge, so he can play the game more advantageously than the other player. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be actively played.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 transit to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the return button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is transited from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are displayed, the game screen automatically shifts to the top screen 211 regardless of the player's operation (automatic transition).

  More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the state where the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (the operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the medal insertion slot 22 to place medals). When the input operation is performed, the screen automatically changes to the top screen 211. In addition, in the state where there is a high probability that a winning combination (or a sub-flag) related to a replay that performs a replay operation like the ART game state is high (high rep state), the replay operation associated with the replay winning is performed. As a result, medals are automatically inserted, and as a result, the chances of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high-rip state. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the medal is automatically inserted by the operation of the replay, when the start operation is performed instead of the medal insertion, the top screen is automatically displayed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Transition to 211.

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the re-play operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 automatically transit to the top screen 211, and the re-play operation is performed. If is not performed, when the insertion operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214 and 215 are automatically changed to the top screen 211.

(Display the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, from the various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be transitioned by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212, The top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is manually or automatically transitioned. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , A return button), the display screen is transited from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while displaying various display screens, the screen automatically changes to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time to transit to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is made different depending on the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, the volume may be adjusted to an unintended volume by an erroneous operation, and the erroneous operation makes other players uncomfortable. Since there is a possibility that it will end up, it transits to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

  In other words, various display screens are set with the time to transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212), and the volume adjustment screen is set with a shorter time than other display screens. The registration screen has a longer time than other display screens.

(Function to select whether to operate the menu)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the player makes various transitions from the menu screen 212 to a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen, so that various types of display screens can be displayed. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions selectable by the player may be restricted according to the settings on the game store side.

  For example, the game shop can disable the volume control by the player by limiting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (eg, not displaying the volume button 212g on the menu screen 212). .

[Modification of First Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and alert lottery during normal ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when the advantageous state (eg, CT) is won, the next game is immediately changed to the advantageous state. However, in the pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for the player, the advantageous control may not be performed immediately, but the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called aura game. In the present modification, for example, when the CT lottery is won during the normal ART, the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches the predictive game a predetermined number of times, rather than performing the CT immediately, will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (A), during the normal ART, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination by using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 65). If this CT lottery is won, it shifts to a state called CT (additional chance zone), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, various lottery for CT lottery is performed on the main side (main control board 71) until winning the CT lottery. . Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine an internal winning combination, and also serves as an internal winning combination "F_ sure chililip", "F_1 sure chililip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip A". When any one of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 62).

  On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, during the CT sign after winning the CT lottery, the CT based on the winning combination after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the winning combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” and the winning combination “reach eye lip”). It is assumed that the lottery and the like will not be performed to give a privilege to the player. Then, during this CT sign, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, in the case where the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the symbol combination of "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won. , Information for displaying the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed on the display unit 100.

  As described above, in the recent pachi-slot machines, it is required that the lottery that influences the player's profit (ball payout) is performed on the main side. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the lottery for the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period during which the result does not have any effect on the player's profit is provided (during CT sign), and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. As a result, for example, in a situation where a privilege of CT sign is determined to be given, it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special symbol combination "reach-eye lip", which increases the variation of the symbol combination appearance. Therefore, improvement in game play can be expected.

  Note that FIG. 118B is a flag conversion lottery table during the sign of CT used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76. The flag conversion lottery table in the sign of CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table during the CT sign, during the CT sign, the role “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is converted to the role “reach eye lip” with a very high probability. I understand. As a result, when the winning combination “F_reach-eyes lip A” to “F_reach-eyes lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of symbols of “reach-eyes lip” is displayed with high probability. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that he is in the omen. It should be noted that, again, if the winning of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is issued, but the privilege is not given.

  Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the sign of CT may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during the period that does not affect the profit of the player as in this modification, the main side is selected. This is preferable because the data capacity and the processing load can be reduced.

<Another example of the pressing sequence for displaying 3 consecutive chill lip>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, when the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of “three consecutive chililip” is displayed. If the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed (Fig. 50). In addition, the pressing order of the correct answers is assumed to be “forward pressing” with respect to the winning combination “F_certain Chilelip” and “F_1 certain Chilelip”.

  In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the combination “F_Sure Chiriripu” and “F_1 Sure Chiriripu” are determined as the internal winning combination, the number of types of symbol combinations displayed at the time of an incorrect answer in the pressing order is increased. , The order of pressing the correct answer is different for each of the roles of "F_ sure Chilelip" and "F_1 sure Chilelip".

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” has the correct pressing order “the forward press (the first stop operation is the left reel. 3L) ”and the incorrect pressing order is“ middle press (reel 3C where the first stop operation is middle) ”and“ reverse press (first stop operation is the right reel 3R) ”. And, in the case of the combination “F_Sure Chiririp”, the combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chilirips” is displayed when pressed forward, the combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed when “middle pressed”, and “reverse press” In the case of "", a combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chiririp" is displayed.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, in the case of the role “F_1 definite chiririp”, the correct pressing order is “reverse pressing”, and the incorrect pressing order is “forward pressing” and “middle pressing”. And And, the combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed when the hand "F_1 probability chili lip" is pressed backward, and the combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed when the character is "middle pressed", and "forward press" In the case of "", a combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chiririp" is displayed.

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, when one of the winning combinations “F_Sure Chiririp” and “F_1 Sure Chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination, the type of the winning combination is the one that is “pressed forward”. Depending on the type of winning combination, "3 consecutive chili lip" or "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed according to the type of winning combination. . On the other hand, when one of the winning combinations "F_Sure Chiririp" or "F_1 Sure Chiririp" is decided as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of "Replay" will be applied regardless of the type of the winning combination when "Internal press" Is displayed.

  By doing so, for example, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chilirip” is determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) that make the Chile symbols come to be possible. Specifically, it is possible to perform both "navigation to push Chile pattern by pushing forward" and "navi to push Chile pattern by pressing backward". In addition, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the “Navi to aim Chile pattern by pushing forward” is the navigation to display “3 consecutive Chile Lips” The "navigation aiming at Chile pattern" is a navigation for not displaying "three consecutive Chilelips" (two consecutive Chilelips are displayed). On the other hand, when the winning combination "F_1 Sure Chiririp" is decided as the internal winning combination, "Navigating the Chile pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "3 consecutive chilirips". The "navigation that aims at Chile pattern by pressing" is a navigation for displaying "three consecutive Chilelips" (two consecutive Chilelilips are displayed).

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side, navigation is performed under the control of the sub side. Is executed.

  FIG. 119 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side during normal ART and the navigation on the sub side. During the normal ART, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 62). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

  Specifically, in the case of non-winning at the time of the flag conversion lottery in the first stage of the flag conversion lottery in the two stages, the sub control board 72 performs “replay navigation”. In this "replay navigation", the sub control board 72 notifies the player to press the middle button. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), a combination of symbols of "Replay" is displayed when the player presses the middle button regardless of whether the winning combination is "F_certain Chilelip" or "F_1 sure Chilelip".

  Further, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won in the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 carries out “Chillip hopping navigation”. In this “Chililip fanning navigation”, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chilirip” is an internal winning combination (sub flag is “Replay”), the sub-control board 72 informs the player to press the Chile symbol by pressing it backwards, When "F_1 definite chilli lip" is an internal winning combination (sub-flag is "replay"), the player is informed so that the Chile symbol can be aimed by pressing the button normally. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), a combination of symbols of "two consecutive chilirips" is displayed when the combination "F_certain chililip" is pressed backwards and when the combination "F_1 confirmation chililip" is pressed forward. Will be.

  Further, when both of the flag conversion lottery in the first stage and the flag conversion lottery in the second stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery are won, the sub-control board 72 carries out “chilly lip complete navigation”. In this "Chilirip complete navigation", the sub-control board 72 informs the player to press the Chile symbol by pressing forward when the winning combination "F_Sure Chilirip" is an internal winning combination (sub flag is "3 Chile A"). However, when the winning combination “F_1 Sure Chile Lip” is an internal winning combination (the sub flag is “3 Chile B”), it is notified so that the Chile symbol can be aimed by reversely pressing. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), the combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" is displayed in any case when the hand "F_certain chili lip" is pushed forward and when the hand "F_1 sure chili lip" is pushed backward. Will be.

  As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (though the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, the combination of the symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor) but is performed only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in this modified example, not only "navigation complete navigation", but also "navigation incentive navigation" can be performed, so that navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side. Is improved.

[Effect of pachi-slot machine]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is stopped while the drive motor E25 is excited does not elapse for a prescribed time (for example, 65000 ms). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the drive motor E25 with age.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to prevent the reel screen mechanism F1 from being stopped in a state in which the drive motor F21 is excited for a prescribed time or more, the deterioration of the drive motor F21 with age progresses. Can be suppressed. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can suppress failures due to the progress of aging deterioration of the drive motor E25 and the drive motor F21.

  Further, in the case of moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the stationary position, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment sets the front standby position or the second stationary position as the first stationary position according to the effect being executed. Since the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front exposure position and the effect produced by the front screen mechanism E1 is ended, the effect being executed can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 can be moved to the stationary position, the reel standby mechanism as the first stationary position or the second stationary position is selected depending on the effect being executed. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel exposed position and the effect by the reel screen mechanism F1 is ended, the effect being executed can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is output by the projector mechanism B2 among the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, triggered by the detection of an error relating to the gaming machine. Since the error image corresponding to the screen mechanism on which the image is displayed is output to the projector mechanism B2, the visibility of the error image can be improved.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment outputs to the projector mechanism B2 an error image corresponding to the screen mechanism on which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed, from the error image stored in the ROM cartridge board 76. Therefore, the error image corresponding to the screen on which the image output by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed can be output to the projector mechanism B2.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is an image display device in which the display performance is stable because the display area is narrower than the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 and is immovable. The error relating to the pachi-slot machine 1 can also be confirmed by 201a.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position and the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position. By moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position after the movable screen is moved to the front position, the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes inconsistent, and the movable accessory does not operate normally. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position. By moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position after moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front position, the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes inconsistent, and these movable accessory parts do not operate normally. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position, when it judges that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 Since the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position is executed after the mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when performing the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, when it determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position, the front screen Since the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position is executed after the mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, it is possible to execute the effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel standby position when executing the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position, the front screen In order to insert the effect data indicating the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel standby position before the effect data indicating the effect of moving the mechanism E1 from the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position. After that, an effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position can be executed.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when performing the effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, when it determines that the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism E1. In order to insert the effect data indicating the effect of moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front standby position before the effect data indicating the effect of moving the mechanism F1 from the reel standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position. After that, an effect of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position can be executed.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment relates to the position of the screen mechanism in order to prohibit the drive of the corresponding screen mechanism when an error related to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is detected. It is possible to take measures when the screen mechanism as a movable accessory does not operate normally without requiring special processing for eliminating the error.

  Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment prohibits the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 on condition that an error is detected a predetermined number of times in succession, the pachi-slot machine 1 is not affected by disturbance. Thus, it is possible to prevent the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 from being prohibited when an error relating to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is erroneously detected.

  In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the initialization operation by turning on the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 (so-called “power-on reset”), and thus the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Since the error relating to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be eliminated, the number of errors is reset when the power is turned on. It is possible to take measures when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 does not operate normally without requiring special processing.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with the image display device 201a capable of displaying information related to the game in addition to the display unit 100 for displaying the effect image during the unit game, and thus the unit game. Even during the game, it is possible to display information about the game without interrupting the effect.

  In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the user interface image for starting the recording of the game information in response to the operation of the touch sensor 201b even during the unit game, in the image display device 201a. Therefore, it is possible to start recording the game information from the unit game without interrupting the effect.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the gaming state has not transitioned to the predetermined gaming state, by lighting the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b which are the light sources of the decorative portions 22a and 22b at low brightness, Since it is easy to visually recognize the pattern decorated on the decoration portions 22a and 22b, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know where the lighting state is before and when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state. .

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the protective cover 20 has a light shielding property of a predetermined ratio with respect to the light incident from the outside to the inside, the visibility of the image displayed on the display unit by the external light is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b are turned off, the light source data for turning off the decoration LEDs 23a and 23b is converted into side lamp data which is turned on at a predetermined low brightness, Since the lighting states of the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b are controlled based on the converted side lamp data, only by converting the side lamp data, the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b are set to a low level during a period in which the decorative LEDs 23a and 23b are required to be turned off. It can be illuminated with brightness.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the emission of the chance button LED 34 provided on the chance button 33 and the display of the image prompting the operation of the chance button 33 are linked, and the opportunity button LED 34 is turned off and the chance button LED 34 is turned off. Since the end of the display of the image prompting the operation of the button 33 is linked, the player can be prompted to perform the operation without causing a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, based on the predetermined lottery value and the random number for lottery, and thus triggers the operation of the chance button 33. The effect can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when performing an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, an image simulating the shape of the chance button 33 is displayed at the approximate center of the display area of the display unit 100. Since it is displayed in the area, the operation of the chance button 33 can be urged so as to be easily visually recognized.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when executing the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, the predetermined execution condition is satisfied even if the chance button 33 is not operated. For example, since the effect is triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, the interest of the player can be improved by the effect.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when performing an effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33, even if the chance button 33 is not operated, for the next unit game Since the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 is executed when the medal is inserted, the effect triggered by the operation of the chance button 33 can be executed almost certainly.

  In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the operation order notification image indicating the operation order of the stop operation so that the area for displaying the operation order notification image moves according to the movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1. By switching to the projector mechanism B2, the visibility of the operation sequence notification image is ensured, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 which is movable to the reel exposure position where it is exposed so as to cover the fixed screen mechanism D is not at the reel exposure position, the fixed screen mechanism D is moved to the first position. An operation sequence notification image corresponding to one display area is displayed on the first display area of the fixed screen mechanism D, and when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposed position, the operation order notification image is displayed according to the second display area of the fixed screen mechanism D. By displaying the operation order notification image in the second display area of the fixed screen mechanism D, the visibility of the operation order notification image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 movable to the reel exposure position where it is exposed so as to cover the fixed screen mechanism D is not at the reel exposure position, the front surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is shown. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position, the operation sequence notification image is displayed in the first display area included in the display area, and the operation order notification image is displayed in the second display area included in the lower surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the visibility of the operation order notification image is secured, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a combination of symbols based on "three consecutive chillips" when "three consecutive chillips" have an added value when an internal winning is given to the "three consecutive chillips". Notify the operation sequence of the stop operation to stop on the effective line, and if the "triple chililip" has no added value, a combination of symbols different from the symbol combination based on the "triple chililip" is activated By notifying the operation sequence of the stop operation to be stopped above, avoiding the situation where the player cannot obtain added value even if the combination of symbols based on the "three consecutive chili lip" is stopped on the activated line. There is.

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a player who cannot obtain added value even if the combination of symbols based on “three consecutive chili lip” is stopped on the activated line. It is possible to prevent the interest of the person from being lowered.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the front standby position sensor E15a for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the step count F When the front standby position sensor E15a changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count F to "23" when the detection state changes to the non-detection state. , The error in the number of steps when the detection state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment produces an effect using the front screen mechanism E1 due to the deviation between the movable position of the front screen mechanism E1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the front screen mechanism E1. Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel standby position sensor F19 for detecting that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the step count R When the reel standby position sensor F19 changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count R to “3” when the detection state changes to the non-detection state. , The error in the number of steps when the detection state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment produces an effect using the reel screen mechanism F1 due to the deviation between the movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the reel screen mechanism F1. Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs step counting when the front exposure position sensor E15b for detecting that the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state. When the front exposure position sensor E15b changes from the non-detection state to the detection state by correcting the step count to "188" when the detection state changes from "192" to the detection state. The error in the number of steps when the state changes to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment produces an effect using the front screen mechanism E1 due to the deviation between the movable position of the front screen mechanism E1 managed by the sub CPU 102 and the actual movable position of the front screen mechanism E1. Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 131. Note that detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted.

[Game flow of pachi-slot machine according to second embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 120, a game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is a game state transition flow regarding the presence or absence of notification of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the game state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 120 with the transition flow of the game state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 36, the first embodiment and the second embodiment Although the game is basically played in the same flow as that of the above form, the game is played in a different flow during the ART game state. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the control of CT during the ART gaming state is greatly different.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal ART, and the gaming state is changed to CT when the CT lottery is won.
On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. Note that the MB (role “F_MB”) is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special accessory, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 has the MB internally winning. When the winning combination is determined, it is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination “C_MB”) is displayed along the activated line.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, between the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state is a normal ART, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between MB flags when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during (H) normal ART. Between the MB flags in the ART gaming state, the game is played so that the symbol combination relating to the MB is not displayed, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. Note that a method of playing a game so that a symbol combination corresponding to MB is not displayed between MB flags is already known, and for example, a symbol whose symbol combination corresponding to MB is not displayed is aimed at. This can be realized by notifying, or notifying the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

  On the other hand, when CT ends, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) When the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the ending condition of the (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag, and the normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, it is possible to perform stop control different from that during the MB non-flag. For example, when the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, the internal winning combination is “MB + predetermined small because the MB is carried over during the MB flag. However, since the MB is not carried over during the MB non-flag, the internal winning combination is only the “predetermined small winning combination”. In the pachi-slot machine, the stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination. Therefore, even if the same predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, different stop control is performed. The stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small winning combination can be made different between MB flags and MB non-flags.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the stop control is made different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, so that it is difficult (or impossible to display) during normal ART (during MB non-flag). By displaying such a combination of symbols during CT (between MB flags), various game characteristics are realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be specifically described while focusing on the difference from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment have different types of winning combinations and different types of symbol combinations, this point will be described first.

(Type of winning combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_chiririp”, “F_certain chililip”, “F_1 sure chililip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “R_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” are used in place of these roles.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, instead of these winning combinations, the winning combinations “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” are used. In the following, the combinations “F_press order bell 1” to “F_press order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “press order bell”. In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment uses a winning combination (role “F_MB”) related to an MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have. Note that other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

(Type of symbol combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd”, the design of “bell”, “bell spilled eyes”, and “one sheet appearance” Used a combination. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6”, in addition to the combination of these symbols, A combination of symbols "MB" and "cactus" is used. The combination of the symbols "MB" may be arbitrary. Further, the combination of symbols of “cactus” may be the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of symbols of “bell”. (9 sheets).

<Correspondence between winning symbol and stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination during the MB non-flag and a combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 121, during the MB non-flag period, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is “. In the case of “press forward”, the combination of symbols of “replay” is displayed along the activated line. On the other hand, when the pressing order is other than "Forward pressing", the combination of the symbols of "Cililip" in the correct pressing order is displayed along the activated line, and the combination of the symbols of "Replay" in the incorrect pressing order is Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of “single chililip” is displayed, and In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order for each role, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the combination “F_2 series Chilelip 1” to “F_2 series Chilelip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of “two series Chilelip” is displayed, and for each combination In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, the combination of symbols of “3 consecutive series Chilelip” is displayed, and for each combination. In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed.

  Further, during the MB non-flag, the combinations of the symbols “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” that are displayed according to the pressing order are different, and the correct answer is given for each combination. In the case of pressing order, the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed, and in the case of incorrect pressing order for each combination, the combination of symbols "Bell spilled" or "1st appearance" is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol during the MB flag>
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination during MB flags and a combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 122, during the MB flag, the combination of symbols “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 continuous lip lip 4” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the winning combination “F_MB” and one of the winning combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, it is always “ A combination of symbols of "Cililip" is displayed along the activated line.

  More specifically, in the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, the combination of symbols of “single chililip” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination “F_2 consecutive chililip 1” is displayed. ~ In "F_2 consecutive chililip 4", the combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chililip" is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pushing order, and in the part "F_3 consecutive chililip 4" to "F_3 consecutive chililip 4", it does not matter in the pushing order. Instead, a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chilirips" is displayed along the activated line.

  Comparing FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip 4” are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination of symbols is different, the pressing order is not affected during the MB flag for the combination of symbols displayed.

  Further, during the MB flags, the combinations “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and are defined for each combination. A combination of symbols of "bell", "bell spilled or first sheet", "cactus" and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, the combination of symbols of more types than during the MB non-flag during winning the combination “push order bell” is won. Can be displayed. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols “bell” and “bell spilled or first sheet” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” and the combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order” during the MB flag. The stop control for the bell 6 "is different from the stop control for the winning combination" F_ single chililip 1 "to" F_3 consecutive chililip 4 "and the winning combinations" F_ push order bell 1 "to" F_ push order bell 6 ". .

[Game flow during normal ART]
Next, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” that are displayed differ depending on the pressing order. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the flag conversion lottery is performed, and when the flag conversion lottery is won, the “chililip” The notification for displaying the combination of symbols is given, and the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is given without adding the number of ART games.

  Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the additional amount of the ART game when the flag conversion lottery is won, based on the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, the smallest addition amount is determined, and the combination If it is “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4”, the next smaller amount to be added is determined, and if the role “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined, the largest additional amount is determined. To do. As described above, when the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “Chililip” is performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the more the amount of addition is. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Subsequently, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The data tables shown in FIGS. 123 and 124 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<ART flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 123 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART according to the second embodiment. The in-art flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the ART flag conversion lottery table to convert the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” into the winning combination “Chillilip”. Whether or not to do the lottery (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pushing order for each winning combination through the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub-control board 72 informs an incorrect answer pushing order for each winning combination through the display unit 100.

<Addition lottery table during normal ART>
Subsequently, FIG. 124 is a normal ART mid-time additional lottery table used for extra lottery to add the number of ART games performed during the normal ART in the second embodiment. The normal lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information on the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery using the additional lottery table during this normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, The corresponding additional game number is added (added to the ART number of finished games counter). Note that the lottery value information associated with the winning combination “single chili lip” in the figure is the role “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” in which the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is a combination. The information of the lottery value which is referred to in this case and is associated with the winning combination “two consecutive chilirips” is the internal winning combination when the winning for the flag conversion lottery is “F_2 consecutive chililip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chililip 4”. The information on the lottery value which is referred to in a certain case and is associated with the winning combination “three consecutive chilirips” is the internal winning combination when the flag conversion lottery is won, “F_three consecutive chililip 1” to “F_three consecutive chililip 4”. Is referred to when.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, a flow of the game during CT of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by a set of eight games, but the pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment is used. In 1, the main control board 71 is based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting “the number of medals used in the game” from “the number of medals paid out”). Manage the duration of CT.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, performs a notification for winning the MB at the time of winning the combination “push order bell”). ). Here, when the combination of symbols “Bell” and “Cactus” is displayed, nine medals are paid out. Therefore, when the combination of symbols “Bell” is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT If the flag conversion lottery is not won in the middle), the difference number (6 sheets) in which the duration of CT is increased is consumed.
On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of "cactus" is displayed during CT (more specifically, when the flag conversion lottery is won during CT), the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is displayed. Then, the duration of CT is maintained.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 indicate a pressing order in which a combination of symbols of “cactus” is displayed for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When notifying and not winning the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order.

  Then, the main control board 71 increases the difference number by 6 when the combination of the symbols of “bell” or “cactus” is displayed, and consumes the duration of CT, but wins the flag conversion lottery. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 to the number of finished CT sheets in addition to the difference number. As a result, although the difference number in CT is increased by 6 due to the display of the combination of the symbols of “Cactus”, the number of the end of CT is also increased by 6, so when the flag conversion lottery is won, Will be maintained.

  The flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX", and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

  This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the main control board 71 has the lowest winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” during the CT. There is a chance that the CT meter will be promoted, and if the roles "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4" will be decided as internal winning combinations during CT, the CT meter will be promoted with the next lowest probability, and during CT When "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

  Further, when the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination “push order bell” during CT, it demotes the CT meter. It should be noted that the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability or may necessarily demote the CT meter when the flag conversion lottery is non-win.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of ART games is added. The amount of addition of the number of ART games varies depending on the number of Chile symbols displayed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the main control board 71 plays a role of “F_Single Chile Lip 1 during CT”. ~ "F_ single Chilelip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and during CT, the roles "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations. Then, the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the winning combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the maximum additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. The data tables shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 126 is a flag conversion lottery table during CT used for flag conversion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the ART flag conversion lottery table to change the roles “F_press order bell 1” to “F_press order bell 6” to “cactus”. Whether to convert or not is randomly determined (flag conversion lottery). Then, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the combination of the symbols of “cactus” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the press order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, the combination of the "bell" symbol for each winning combination won through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order for displaying.

  Here, referring to FIG. 126, the flag conversion lottery during CT is found to be easier to win as the value of the CT meter is higher, and when the CT meter is “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery is always won. I understand. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is “MAX”, CT continues without being terminated. It should be noted that since the profit to be given to the player becomes excessive if the CT is not finished, it may be possible to demote the CT meter at a predetermined timing when the CT meter becomes “MAX”, and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets. May be provided, and both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

  When demoting the CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the interest of the player will be lost. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages of "1" to "MAX", for example, it is assumed that the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been played after the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed 8 times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Further, the value of the CT meter after the demotion is arbitrary, and for example, the CT meter may be downgraded to "1" or the CT meter may be downgraded to "7". The value of the demotion destination may be determined by lottery from "" to "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 127 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current value of the CT meter and the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 127, the probability of winning the lottery for the promotion of the CT meter is lowest in the role “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, and in the role “F_2 double chililip 1” to “F_2 double chililip 4”. It is understood that the second lowest, the combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is the highest. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Addition lottery table during CT>
Next, FIG. 128 is a CT additional lottery table used for additional lottery to add the number of ART games performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The additional lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding additional number of additional games is added (( It is added to the ART end game counter).

  Referring to FIG. 128, as for the amount of addition of the ART game during CT, the combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_single Chilelip 4” has the smallest amount, and the combination “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4”. Next, it can be seen that the number of the roles “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is the largest. More specifically, in the roles “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_single Chilelip 4” in which one Chile symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 or more games is added, and in which two Chile symbols are displayed. In “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4”, the number of ART games of 20 or more games is added, and three Chile symbols are displayed. In “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4”, More than 30 ART games will be added. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chile symbols displayed during CT.

[Game flow during CZ]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a game flow during CZ of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs, like the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of the CZ3 is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of the CZ1, 2 is the first embodiment. It is different from the pachi-slot machine 1.

  Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CZ1 and CZ2 are divided into the first half and the second half, and the ranks (modes and points) of different expectation of winning the ART lottery in the first half are promoted. Then, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect in the second half (see FIG. 54). As shown in FIG. 129, the basic flow in the CZ1 and CZ2 is the same in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment.

  On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the termination condition of the first half. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2 are terminated based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ1 is the continuous game. Although the first half is ended based on the number, the CZ2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both the CZ1 and CZ2 perform the lock lottery in the first half, and the first half of the CZ1 and 2 are also terminated when the lock lottery is won.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. This rank-up lottery is similar to that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 57), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. This lock lottery is a process of lottery as to whether or not to perform game lock based on an internal winning combination. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 terminates the first half of the CZ1 and locks the game (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-win, the main control board 71 continues the first half of CZ1 without ending the first half of CZ1 until the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games.

  Then, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the latter half when the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games or when the lottery is won. In the second half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. This ART lottery is also similar to that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (C)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, the main control board 71 is in the case of winning the lock lottery. Make sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state if the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation in the case of winning the ART lottery. .

  On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 58), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs the end lottery for each game in the first half of CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 is ended and the latter lot is moved to, while the end lottery is not selected. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

  In the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. When the main lottery board 71 wins the lock lottery, it terminates the first half of the CZ2 and locks the game. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ2 but continues the first half of CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

When the final lottery or the lock lottery is won, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. This ART lottery is also similar to that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 59 (B) and (C)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, the main control board 71 will be explained in the case of winning the lock lottery. Make sure to win the ART lottery.
The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state if the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation in the case of winning the ART lottery. .

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is to win the end lottery instead of the number of continuous games. different.

[Data table in CZ]
Next, the data table used during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The data tables shown in FIGS. 130 and 131 are stored in the main ROM 94 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 130 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 according to the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 130, in the first half of the CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the end lottery is performed, and this end lottery is won with a high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the winning combination “replay” is one of winning combinations “F_maintain rep A” to “F_RT4 rep_3rd”. In the pachi-slot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1 / 7.3) or more. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 ends. It turns out that the situation occurs relatively often.

<Lock lottery table>
Next, FIG. 131 is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 131 (A) is a lock lottery table used in the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. 131B is a lottery table, and FIG. 131B is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of the CZ2. The lock lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Comparing FIGS. 131 (A) and 131 (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 wins with a higher probability than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) have passed, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the final lottery is won. Further, the rank-up lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1, 2, and when the first half of the CZ1, 2 is finished, the ART lottery is performed based on the result of the rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is indefinite.

  Also, the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination with a relatively high probability, so during CZ2, the rank-up lottery is performed compared to during CZ1. The chances of receiving it tend to decrease. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in the CZ2 than in the CZ1. As a result, even in the case of CZ2, which is less likely to receive rank-up lottery, it is possible to expect the transition to ART.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.

<CT sign game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, if the transition is made between MB flags during normal ART, it is decided to immediately transit to CT from the next game, but between MB flags It is also possible to insert the precursor game a predetermined number of times after shifting to.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (A), when MB is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the game state between the MB non-flag and the MB flag. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), if the winning of the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is won, the number of ART games is added (see FIG. 124), The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags affects the privilege given to the player, and therefore is performed on the main side (main control board 71).

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols “Cililip” is always displayed regardless of the order of pressing when it is between the MB flags, it is decided to perform the omen game during the MB flags. In this case, the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) may make it clear to the player that the aura game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 121, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols of “Chillip” is not displayed when the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is won. If the combination of symbols “Cililip” is displayed by pressing the forward button, the player will know that it is during the MB flag (in the precursor game).

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pushing order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination among the MB flags, the combination of symbols of “chililip” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the push order is notified, the player recognizes that the combination of symbols “Cililip” is displayed according to the notified push order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flag. It can be difficult to grasp.

  Note that such a push order notification does not have any effect on the player's profit, so in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, a lottery (notification of whether or not to notify the push order during the MB flag). The lottery is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery during the MB flag may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player at all on the sub side as in this modification, the data capacity of the main side is increased. It is preferable because the processing load can be reduced.

  FIG. 132 (B) is a notification lottery table during the sign of CT used for notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76. The notification lottery table in the sign of CT defines the information of the lottery value about the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

  When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table during this CT sign is won, the sub control board 72 notifies any pressing order other than the normal pressing through the display unit 100.

<Navigation during the press order bell win between MB flags>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the combination "push order bell" is won during the MB flag, more combinations of symbols are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols "bell" and "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, " A combination of symbols such as “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell spilled or first sheet” is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary for displaying the combination of the symbols of "cactus" that can be displayed only during the MB flag is notified during the CT during the MB flag. I am trying.

  In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, the notification content is changed according to the state up to the MB start.

  Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the gaming state shifts between the MB flags, and then the CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches the predictive game a predetermined number of times after moving between the MB flags, the state during the MB flag is divided into a “predictive game” state, a “CT” state, and an “MB waiting” state. be able to.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, if the MB is won during the normal ART, the “predicament game” state during the MB flag is set, and thereafter, the predecessor game is performed a predetermined number of times and the CT starts, The state becomes the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then, when the CT ends, the state becomes the "MB waiting state" until the MB wins.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the content of notification at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” is changed according to the state during the MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133, in the “presage game” state, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display a combination of “bell” symbols via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Notify the pressing order. Further, in the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “bell” or “cactus” is displayed via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. That is, in the "CT" state, the pressing order corresponding to either "bell" or "cactus" is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

  In the “MB standby” state after CT is finished, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify any combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols “bell” is displayed, and the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols “cactus” is displayed. The notification may be given, or the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “MB” is displayed may be given.

  On the other hand, during normal ART, the combination of symbols of "cactus" cannot be displayed, so the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pushing order in which the combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed.

[Effects of Pachi-Slot Machine of Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, it is possible to display more kinds of symbol combinations than during the MB non-flag during the winning of the combination “push order bell”. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols “bell” and “bell spilled or first sheet” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed.

  As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the games during the MB flags. Specifically, it becomes possible to display a combination of symbols of "cactus" corresponding to the so-called rare combination between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare combination without changing the type of the winning combination and the winning probability. Can be increased. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed when the winning combination “push order bell” is won is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of rare winning combinations with payouts of medals. .

  In addition, when the combination of the symbols of “cactus” is continuously displayed during the MB flag, it is understood that the MB flag is in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of symbols of "cactus" is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the combination of symbols of "bell" is notified in the case of non-winning. To do. This is preferable because it makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state. Further, by controlling the content of the notification by the flag conversion lottery, it is possible to adjust the frequency of the symbol combination (rare part) of the "cactus" among the MB flags, and to diversify the game characteristics among the MB flags. You can

(Game during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone in which the number of ART games is added, is performed during the MB flag. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, CT that continues until the difference number reaches the end number (50) during the MB flag is performed. During this CT, if you do not win the flag conversion lottery during the winning of the role "push order bell", the difference number will increase and the duration of CT will be exhausted, while if you win the flag conversion lottery, the difference number will end with an increase in the difference number. Is increased and the duration of CT is maintained. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is changed according to the combination of symbols to be displayed while changing the stop control during the MB flag (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery). Since it is possible to control the duration of, it is possible to diversify the game play during the MB flag.

  At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. can do. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, and is demoted if the winning between flags is not won during CT. The player has a strong interest in the result of the game during CT, and can diversify the playability between MB flags.

  In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", you will have to win the flag conversion lottery for a certain period of time, so you can have expectations for the subsequent games, and the interest in the game will increase. Is improved.

(Combinations of symbols that can be displayed during MB flag and MB non-flag)
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” is different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, but also the combination “F_ The combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning "Single Chile Lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive Chile Lips" is also different. That is, while the MB non-flag is displayed, the combination of symbols "Replay" or "Chililip" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed. Only the combination of the symbols of "Cililip" is displayed without any.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag. In the flag conversion lottery during the MB flag, the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "push order bell" is randomly selected from the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and also during the MB non-flag. In the flag conversion lottery, the target to be notified at the time of winning the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip” is drawn from a combination of symbols of “replay” or “chililip”. In this way, by performing the flag conversion lottery both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag, it is possible to control the combination of symbols displayed in both the MB flag and the MB non-flag, It is possible to enhance the game play both between flags and between non-flags.

  At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery during the MB flag is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery during the MB non-flag is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. It As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, it may be known from the combination of the symbols displayed that the MB flag is being reached. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the push order that is originally unnecessary is notified during the MB flag, and it is difficult to grasp that the MB flag is in progress. Then, by controlling the notification of the pushing order on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load on the main side.

[Modification]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bernavi between flag and non-flag between)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main side informs by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor. The mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first and second embodiments, and therefore an example thereof is shown in FIG. 78 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 78, while "white 7 navi" and "blue 7 navi" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed. “Bernavi” or the like may be performed during the state.

  In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 78 (A) and (B), when performing "bell navigation" in the non-flag state, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value of "1" to "3" (push order combination second instruction information). ) On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, when performing "Bell Navi" in the inter-flag state, display a numerical value of "12" to "14" (first push order combination instruction information) on the instruction monitor. May be Note that the navigation on the sub side via the display unit 100 may be common in both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and if the numerical value when performing "Bernavi" during the MB non-flag and the numerical value when performing "Bernavi" during the MB flag are different. It may be done.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether or not to grant the privilege is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, it is displayed when the notification follow stop operation is performed. The combination of symbols will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give the privilege based on the combination of the symbols actually displayed.

  In this case, the main control board 71 gives a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the combination of the symbols displayed without following the notification. However, the privilege may not be granted. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the pressing order, so the player ignores the notification and performs a stop operation. In that case, there is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as "three consecutive chilirips" will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of the notification without giving the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profit (privilege))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, for the notification that affects the profit, the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) is performed on the main side, and the notification is performed on the main side. Whether the notification does not affect profits is controlled by the sub side performing the notification lottery and controlling whether or not the sub side performs the notification. Then, as an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows the notification of the “reach eye lip” during the precursor game, and the pachi-slot according to the second embodiment. The machine 1 shows the notification of "Chillip" during the MB flag. In this respect, the notification that does not affect the profit is not limited to these.

  In recent years, pachi-slot machines may make a transition to a state in which game locking is easy (difficult) depending on the order of stop operations. For example, if the pressing order is "left, middle, right", transition to a state where it is easy to perform game lock, and if the pressing order is "right, middle, left", transition to a state where it is difficult to perform game lock. There is. In such a pachi-slot machine, by notifying the pressing order, it is possible to make a transition to a state where it is easy (difficult) to perform the game lock, but when whether or not to perform the game lock affects profits, While the notification needs to be controlled on the main side, if the game lock is not effected on the profit, the notification may be controlled on the sub side.

  In addition, when whether or not to perform the game lock affects the profit, for example, the game lock is performed like the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, and the ART lottery is won. This is the case (see FIG. 129). On the other hand, the case where whether or not to perform the game lock does not affect the profit is a case where the game lock is performed as an effect, for example, during the precursor game in which the profit (privilege) is given. By frequently performing the game lock, it is a demonstrative indication that a profit will be given in the subsequent game.

  FIG. 135A is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between a pressing order and a locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of “left, middle, right” when the winning combination “F_maintenance rep A” is won, the lock state changes from “0” to “1”. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing ", left, right, middle", "middle, left, right", "middle, right, left", the current locked state is maintained, and "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of ", middle, left", the lock state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, when the winning combination "F_Maintenance Lip B" is won, the lock state transits from "0" to "1" when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the lock state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), in order to simplify the description, the lock state “0” is set as a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the lock state “1” is set as a state in which the game is easily locked. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, and the number of stages may be three or more. Also, in the case of three or more stages, it is not necessary to transition one stage at a time, but multiple stages may be transited at once.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, the notification lottery as to whether or not to notify is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is displayed. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined pressing order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, the notification lottery of whether or not to notify is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, and based on the result of the lottery, a predetermined pushing order on the sub side. To inform.

  Depending on the pachi-slot machine, there are pachi-slot machines where the game lock affects the profit over the entire period of the game, and there are pachi-slot machines where the game lock does not affect the profit over the entire period of the game. There are pachi-slot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit during the specific period of the game, while the game lock affects the profit during the predetermined period. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, during the period when the game lock affects profit, the notification lottery of whether or not to notify is performed on the main side, and based on the result of the lottery, both the main side and the sub side push a predetermined push. While the order is informed, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the sub-side performs the lottery for notifying whether or not to inform, and the sub-side notifies the predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result. May be

  Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of shifting the lock state according to the pressing order shown in FIG. 135 (A). That is, the main control board 71 randomly determines whether to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting means that sets the lock state based on the detected stop operation sequence and the lock state set by the lock state setting means. When the game lock determination means and the game lock determination means determined by means of performing the game lock, it functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72, the information lottery means for performing the information lottery whether or not to notify the push order that the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult) , And a notification means for notifying a predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result of the notification lottery means.

(Normal ART and CT termination conditions)
The termination conditions for normal ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during the normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during the normal ART or CT, the number of times information that is advantageous to the player during the normal ART or CT, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) As one set, an arbitrary end condition such as the number of sets and a continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

  Also, as the number of medals given during normal ART or CT, for example, use the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game. May be In addition, the number of medals given during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and notification is given regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased in accordance with the above (calculation by an ideal value). Moreover, the number of awarded medals may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, for some winning combinations that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or for a winning combination in which the combination of symbols is displayed / hidden depending on the timing of the stop operation, the winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination. However, the number of awarded medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (push order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operation (pushing order) in which a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, and the combination of the symbols. The timing of the stop operation (the symbol to be aimed at) necessary for displaying may be notified.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game playability), and the state of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use a so-called “AT”, and to activate a re-play high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play becomes high, and to perform a stop operation advantageous for the player. It is also possible to use a so-called “ART” that notifies the mode.

  In the embodiment of the present invention described above, various control processes are described separately as the main control process executed by the main CPU 93 and the sub control process executed by the sub CPU 102. However, various control processes are included in the sub control process. The main CPU 93 may execute the process, or the sub CPU 102 may execute various processes included in the main control process.

  Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the stop operation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is notified, the stop order of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is described, but each reel 3L, The stop position of 3C, 3R may be notified, or the combination of the stop order and the stop position of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be notified.

  Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the game machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine according to the present invention uses a game ball as a game medium. It can also be applied to other game machines such as pachinko game machines used.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 182. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is different from the first and second embodiments in the configuration of the display unit and the mode of effect using the display unit. Further, the third embodiment is different from the first and second embodiments in that a three-dimensional decoration including a decoration part having a crystal motif is provided on the side of the display unit.
In the following description, detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first and second embodiments will be omitted.

[Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137.
FIG. 136 is an overall perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 137 is a front view of the upper portion of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment. The same or corresponding configurations as those of the pachi-slot machine according to the first and second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 137, the illustration of the protective cover 20 is omitted.

  The display unit 200 according to the present embodiment is provided inside the cabinet upper portion 61a. The display unit 200 is a projection mapping device that displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub control board 72, similarly to the display unit 100 in the above-described first and second embodiments. . The display unit 200 produces an effect according to the progress of the game above the display window 4 that exposes a part of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (not shown). The details of the display unit 200 will be described later.

  Inside the protective cover 20 of the upper door 62a, three-dimensional decorations 400 and 500 are provided on the side of the display unit 200. Details of the three-dimensional decorations 400 and 500 will be described later.

[Structure of display unit]
Subsequently, the display unit 200 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 151.
The display unit 200 according to the present embodiment is different from the display unit 100 according to the above-described first and second embodiments in the configuration of the fixed screen mechanism. In the following description, the same points as those of the display unit 100 according to the first and second embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

(Outline of display unit 200)
First, an outline of the display unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the display unit of this embodiment. FIG. 139 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 138. That is, FIG. 139 shows a vertical cross-sectional view of the display unit 200 shown in FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 138. That is, FIG. 140 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the display unit 200 shown in FIG. 138 at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction. FIG. 141 is a partial perspective view of the display unit according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 141, the display of the irradiation light device B and the front screen mechanism E1 are omitted.
Note that FIGS. 138 to 140 each show the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 of the display unit 200 is arranged at the front exposure position (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIGS. 138 to 139, the display unit 200 includes the irradiation light device B and the screen device C, similarly to the display unit 100 described above. Although the illuminating light device B of the display unit 200 and the illuminating light device B of the display unit 100 have slightly different appearances, the illuminating light device B of the display unit 200 has the same main constituent members, structural features, and functions. The detailed description of is omitted.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
As shown in FIGS. 138 to 140, the screen device C of the display unit 200 has a box-shaped screen housing C10. The screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing on the right end of the bottom plate C1, a left side plate C3 standing on the left end of the bottom plate C1, and a rear end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 standing upright. The back plate C4 of the display unit 200 is the same as the back plate C4 of the display unit 100 described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the display unit 200 are the same as the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the display unit 100 described above, although their main configurations and functions are the same but their detailed description is omitted. .

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
As shown in FIGS. 138 to 140, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 in the display unit 200 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view, like the bottom plate C1 in the display unit 100 described above. A fixed screen mechanism G, which will be described later, is placed at the center of the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 200.

In addition, a groove (not shown) into which the lower end of the left movable body base C6 is fitted is formed in the left end of the upper surface of the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 200. Further, a groove (not shown) into which the lower end of the right movable body base C5 is fitted is formed at the right end on the upper surface of the bottom plate C1. The right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 support gears and motors that form the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The front part of the inner surfaces of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 is provided with a predetermined decoration, in the present embodiment, a rock motif decoration.
Since the other points of the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 200 are the same as the bottom plate C1 of the display unit 100 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right hidden wall portion C7, Left hidden wall portion C8)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 138 to 141, the display unit 200 includes a right hidden wall portion C7 and a left hidden wall portion C8 that are formed in a flat plate shape. The right hidden wall portion C7 is arranged near the inside of the right side plate C2. The left hidden wall portion C8 is arranged near the inside of the left side plate C3.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the right hidden wall portion C7 includes an outer surface C7a and an inner surface C7b that are orthogonal to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. The outer surface C7a faces the inner surface of the right side plate C2. As shown in FIG. 141, a cylindrical wall support portion C7c extending outward in the left-right direction is provided from the vicinity of the vertical end of the outer surface C7a. Bolt holes (not shown) communicating with the bolt holes formed in the right side plate C2 are formed inside the wall support portion C7c, and the bolts should be inserted from the outside of the right side plate C2 into these bolt holes. Thus, the right hidden wall portion C7 is supported by the right side plate C2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right hidden wall part C7 covers the front part of the inner surface of the right side plate C2 from the inside in front of the right movable body base C5. At the lower part of the right hidden wall portion C7, the same decoration as the decoration made on the front portion of the right movable body base C (decoration with a rock motif in the present embodiment) is provided.

Further, a semicircular cutout portion C7d is formed from the upper portion of the right hidden wall portion C7 to the substantially central portion. The cutout portion C7d is formed so that the right end portions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 do not interfere with the right hidden wall portion C7.
Since the left hidden wall portion C8 is substantially symmetrical with the right hidden wall portion C7, the corresponding reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  By providing the right hidden wall portion C7 and the left hidden wall portion C8 in the display unit 200, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the inside of the undecorated right side plate C2 and left side plate C3. .

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 139, inside the screen housing C10 of the display unit 200, as in the case of the above-described display unit 100, a plurality of display devices are provided for causing an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. A screen mechanism is provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. The display unit 200 is provided with a fixed screen mechanism G, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 as screen mechanisms.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2, and the reel screen mechanism F1 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are the same as those of the display unit 100 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, the positional relationship between the fixed screen mechanism G, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIGS. 20 to 22) is the same as the positional relationship between these screen mechanisms in the display unit 100, and therefore the description thereof will be given here. Omit it.
Below, the fixed screen mechanism G of a structure different from the fixed screen mechanism D of the above-mentioned display unit 100 is demonstrated in detail.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G)
First, an outline of the fixed screen mechanism G will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the fixed screen mechanism G, and shows a mode in which the fixed screen mechanism G is placed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10. FIG. 143 is an exploded view of the fixed screen mechanism G.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the fixed screen mechanism G includes a louver screen G1, a louver drive mechanism G2, and a rear screen G3.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Louver drive mechanism G2)
As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the louver drive mechanism G2 is mounted on the upper surface of the bottom plate C1 and includes three sets of louver drive units G4, G5, G6 and a cover body G7. The cover body G7 has a substantially plate-shaped lower cover portion G8 whose lower surface is fixed to the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, and an upper cover portion G9 which covers the lower cover portion G8 from above.

  The upper cover part G9 has an upper surface part G10 formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1 and whose lateral direction coincides with the front-rear direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. A frame-shaped side surface portion G11 extending downward along the vertical direction is formed at a rear end portion in the front-rear direction and both end portions in the left-right direction of the upper surface portion G10. The lower end of the side surface portion G11 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate C1.

  The front portion of the upper surface portion G10 is formed with a swell portion G12 that bulges in the left-right direction and is inclined so as to approach the upper surface of the bottom plate C1 as it goes forward. The upper cover part G9 and the lower cover part G8 constitute a substantially box-shaped cover body 7, and a housing space is formed inside the cover body G7. A plurality of gears included in the louver drive units G4, G5, G6 are housed in this housing space. Details of the louver drive units G4, G5, G6 will be described later.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Louver screen G1)
As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the louver screen G1 includes louver plates G13, G14, and G15 that are substantially rectangular flat plate-shaped members. The louver plate G13 includes a pair of long side portions G17 and a short side portion G18. The pair of long side portions G17 extend in parallel along the vertical direction.

  A lower shaft portion G19 extending downward is provided at a substantially central portion of the short side portion G18 located below. Further, an upper shaft portion G20 extending upward is formed substantially at the center of the short side portion 18 located above. The lower shaft portion G19 is connected to the louver drive portion G4, and the upper shaft portion G20 is inserted into a bearing portion G30 of the rear screen G3 described later. As a result, the louver plate G13 is rotatably supported by the louver drive mechanism G2 and the rear screen G3 about the upper shaft portion G20 and the lower shaft portion G19.

The louver plate G13 has a first surface G21a and a second surface G21b (see FIG. 140) on which an image is projected. In the present embodiment, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts, and for convenience of description, one surface is referred to as a first surface G21a and the other surface is referred to as a second surface. Surface G21b.
Since the louver plate G14 and the louver plate G15 have the same configurations as the louver plate G13, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Rear screen G3)
Subsequently, the rear screen G3 of the fixed screen mechanism G will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the rear screen G3 shown in FIG. 143, taken along the line C-C.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 to 144, the rear screen G3 is a member that is placed on the upper surface portion G10 of the cover body G7 and rotatably supports the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, and the curved portion G22 and the frame. And a section G23. The curved portion G22 has a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion G24 which stands upright substantially perpendicular to the upper surface portion G10, and two side plate portions G25 which are continuous with both end portions of the rear plate portion G24 in the left-right direction.

  The side plate portion G25 is a curved plate-shaped member that stands upright substantially perpendicular to the upper surface portion G10. The side plate portion G25 is curved with a predetermined curvature so that the end portion on the opposite side of the end portion on the side that is continuous with the rear plate portion G24 in the left-right direction is located forward. In the present embodiment, the predetermined curvature is set so as not to interfere with the rotating louver plates G13 and G15 (see FIG. 140). The side plate portion G25 can be curved in any manner as long as it can avoid interference with the louver plates G13 and G15.

  Further, the curved portion G22 has a flat plate-shaped top plate portion G26 which forms an upper portion of the curved portion G22 and is arranged substantially horizontally with respect to the upper surface portion G10. The edge portion of the top plate portion G26 is continuous with the upper end portions of the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the frame portion G23 is a member that is arranged in front of the curved portion G22 and is formed in a frame shape that surrounds the front edge portions of the top plate portion G26 and the side plate portion G25. The edge portion inside the frame portion G23 is continuous with the front edge portions of the top plate portion G26 and the side plate portion G25. The frame portion G23 has two side frame portions G28 that stand substantially vertically to the upper surface portion G10, and an upper frame portion G29 that is continuous with the upper ends of the two side frame portions G28. The upper frame portion G29 is provided with a bearing portion G30 into which the upper shaft portions G20 of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are inserted.

  As described later, the image is projected inside the frame portion G23 and the curved portion G22 of the rear screen G3 (the front surfaces of the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25).

(Display unit 200: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism G: Louver drive mechanism G2: Louver drive parts G4, G5, G6)
Next, the louver drive parts G4, G5, G6 of the louver drive mechanism G2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143, 145 and 146.
FIG. 145 is a bottom view of the fixed screen mechanism G. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of a louver drive gear that is a member forming the louver drive unit. Note that, in FIG. 145, the illustration of the lower cover portion G8 is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the louver drive unit G4 drives the louver plate G13. The louver drive unit G5 drives the louver plate G14. Then, the louver drive unit G6 drives the louver plate G15. Since the louver drive parts G4, G5, G6 have the same configuration, the louver drive part G4 will be described in the following description, and the description of the louver drive parts G5, G6 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 145, the louver drive unit G4 has a two-phase excitation type stepping motor G31, a plurality of gears, and a sensor G40.
The stepping motor G31 is electrically connected to the sub control board 72. That is, the drive of the stepping motor G31 is controlled by the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 34) of the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32). In the present embodiment, the stepping motor is controlled by the two-phase excitation method, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stepping motor control of the one-phase excitation method or the one-two-phase excitation method may be performed.

  The stepping motor G31 is placed on the upper cover part G9 from above and is fixed by screws (see FIG. 140). The stepping motor G31 is arranged behind the rear screen G3 (see FIG. 140).

  Here, for example, when the fixed position of the stepping motor G31 is set below the louver plate G13 to be driven, it is necessary to provide a space below the louver plate G13 for disposing the stepping motor G31. Since the accommodation space of the display unit 200 is limited, if a space for accommodating the stepping motor G31 is provided below the louver plate G13, the vertical length of the louver plate G13 must be shortened. Therefore, it is conceivable that the area on the louver plate G13 where the image is projected becomes narrow. On the other hand, when the fixed position of the stepping motor G31 is set to the rear of the rear screen G3 as in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to shorten the length of the louver plate G13 in the vertical direction. It is possible to secure a desired area for the projected area.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 145, the plurality of gears are a motor connection gear G32 connected to the drive shaft of the stepping motor G31, a louver drive gear G33 connected to the lower shaft portion G19 of the louver plate G13, and It is composed of a transmission gear G34. The motor connection gear G32, the louver drive gear G33, and the transmission gear G34 are housed in a housing space formed inside the cover body 7.

  The transmission gear G34 includes a small gear G35 and a large gear G36 having a larger reference circle diameter than the small gear G35. The small gear G35 and the large gear G36 have the same rotation axis and are integrally formed. The transmission gear G34 is rotatably fixed to the upper cover part G9 with a screw.

  The motor connection gear G32 meshes with the large gear G36 of the transmission gear G34. Further, the small gear G35 of the transmission gear G34 meshes with the louver drive gear G33. As a result, when the stepping motor G31 is driven, its driving force is transmitted to the louver drive gear G33 via the motor connection gear G32 and the transmission gear G34. As a result, the louver drive gear G33 is driven (rotated), and the louver plate G13 connected to the louver drive gear G33 is rotated accordingly.

  The gear ratio of the motor connection gear G32, the transmission gear G34, and the louver drive gear G33 is set so that the louver plate G13 rotates once when the stepping motor G31 is driven by one step. By setting in this way, the precision of the operation of the louver plate G13 can be improved. Accordingly, when the image is projected on the louver plate G13, it is possible to prevent the image from being disturbed due to the position of the louver plate G13 deviated from the predetermined rotation position.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the louver drive gear G33 has two protrusions G41 protruding outward in the circumferential direction. The two protrusions G41 are arranged on the same straight line in the radial direction passing through the center of the louver drive gear G33.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the sensor G40 is a photo sensor having a light emitting unit that emits predetermined light and a light receiving unit that can receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit. The sensor G40 is fixed to the upper cover part G9 with a screw. The position where the sensor G40 is fixed is set so that the protrusion G41 is interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit when the louver drive gear G33 is at a predetermined rotation position. The sensor G40 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 32) and outputs a predetermined detection signal indicating whether or not the light receiving section receives the light from the light emitting section.

(Positional relationship between louver plate and louver drive gear and sensor detection status)
Next, the positional relationship between the louver plate and the louver drive gear and the detection state of the sensor will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the louver plate and the louver drive gear. In FIG. 147, the outline of the louver plate G15 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotated, and (a) shows the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above. , (B) shows the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate rotates clockwise when viewed from above, and (c) is a table showing the detection state of the sensor when the louver plate rotates. .

  As shown in FIG. 147, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are located parallel to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1 (that is, when they are located parallel to the player), the first louver plates G13, G14, G15. The surface G21a of is flat. At this time, one protrusion G41 of the louver driving gear G33 of the louver driving portions G4, G5, G6 that drives each of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40. .

  Subsequently, a case where the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 (a) and (c). In FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 that are flush with each other as shown in FIG. 147 are shown as table origins. As shown in FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 located at the table origin are rotated by 6 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, by 6 degrees from the table origin, one protrusion G41. Is removed from between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40, and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40 can receive the light from the light emitting portion.

  When the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rotate from the state shown in FIG. 147 by 174 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, by 174 degrees from the table origin, the other protrusion G41 becomes the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40. Will come to intervene. That is, the light receiving portion of the sensor G40 cannot receive the light from the light emitting portion (cannot receive light). In FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), from this time point, the position where the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are further rotated by 6 steps, that is, the position rotated 180 degrees from the table origin is shown as the back origin. In the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the back origin, the surface opposite to the first surface G21a, which was flush with the front origin, that is, the second surface G21b (see FIG. 140) is flush. Becomes

  When the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the back origin rotate for 6 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, 6 degrees from the back origin, the other protrusion G41 comes out from between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40. The light receiving unit of the sensor G40 can receive the light from the light emitting unit. Further, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the back origin are rotated by 174 steps of the stepping motor G31, that is, rotated 174 degrees from the back origin (or rotated 354 degrees from the front origin), one protrusion G41 causes the sensor G40 to rotate. Is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. That is, the light receiving unit of the sensor G40 cannot receive the light from the light emitting unit. Then, from this state, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are further rotated by 6 steps, the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are returned to the table origin. That is, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rotate 360 degrees.

  Note that FIG. 148 (b) shows the case where the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. 147. The description is omitted because it is the same as the case of rotating.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor)
Subsequently, an excitation mode of the stepping motor will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining an excitation mode of the stepping motor, (a) shows a mode when the louver plate is rotated at the maximum speed, and (b) shows a mode when the louver plate is normally rotated. FIG. 150 shows an excitation mode of the stepping motor when performing the backlash motion, (a) shows a mode of 30-degree backlash motion, and (b) shows a mode of 15-degree backlash motion.

  As described above, the driving of the stepping motor G31 is controlled by the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 34) of the sub control circuit 101 including the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 32). That is, the sub CPU 102 can control the driving direction and the driving speed of the driving shaft of the stepping motor G31 to control the driving of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 in an arbitrary rotating direction and rotating speed.

(Stepping motor excitation mode: fastest rotation)
An excitation mode of the stepping motor G31 when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are driven at the fastest rotation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). In FIG. 149 (a), "CW" of "CW / CWW" in the rotation direction column indicates that the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 rotate clockwise, and "CWW" indicates that the rotation direction is counterclockwise. It indicates that there is. That is, “CW / CWW” indicates that control is possible in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. The sub CPU 102 sets the rotation direction to either “CW” or “CWW” when controlling the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, and G15. In addition, "2-2 phase" in the excitation mode column indicates that the stepping motor G31 is controlled by the two-phase excitation method.

  As shown in the row of “No. 1”, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are driven at the fastest rotation in the present embodiment, first, the sub CPU 102 has a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a frequency of 250 pulse per Second ( Hereinafter, the pulse may be referred to as “pps”) is input to the stepping motor G31, and the stepping motor G31 is driven by four steps from the origin (front origin or back origin). The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rotation per minute (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rpm”). The "slow-up" in the remarks column means that the vehicle is in an accelerated state at the start of rotation.

  Next, as shown in the row of “No. 2”, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 for four steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 3", the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 2 ms, that is, a frequency of 500 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 by an arbitrary number of steps. . The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 83.3 rpm.

  The arbitrary number of steps is set according to the number of steps when the sensor G40 detects the protrusion G41 when stopping the louver plates G13, G14, and G15. For example, when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotated half a turn from the origin (front origin or back origin), that is, 180 degrees, and stopped, the number of steps when rotating 180 degrees is 180 to the number of steps in the acceleration state (No. 8). 1 and No. 2), and 6 steps from the detection of the protrusion G41 by the sensor G40 to the origin are subtracted to obtain 166 steps. Similarly, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotated once from the front origin (or the rear origin), that is, 360 degrees, and stopped, the number of steps is 346.

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 4", the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 by 6 steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 55.5 rpm. As shown in the remarks column, when the stepping motor G31 is driven by 6 steps, the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 becomes the origin (front origin or back origin).

  Next, as shown in the row of “No. 5”, the sub CPU 102 performs control for maintaining an arbitrary excited state until the magnet rotor of the stepping motor G31 stops (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “stop excitation”). .)I do. As a result, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped as shown in the row of "No. 6".

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: normal rotation)
Next, with reference to FIG. 149 (b), an excitation mode of the stepping motor G31 when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotationally driven at the normal speed in the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in the row of "No. 1", when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotationally driven at the normal speed in the present embodiment, first, the sub CPU 102 has a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a frequency of 250 pps. The pulse is input to the stepping motor G31, and the stepping motor G31 is driven by four steps from the origin (front origin or back origin). The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 2", the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 by an arbitrary number of steps. . The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 3", the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a pulse having a frequency of 333 pps, to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 for 6 steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 55.5 rpm. As shown in the remarks column, when the stepping motor G31 is driven by 6 steps, the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 becomes the origin (front origin or back origin).

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 4", the sub CPU 102 performs the above-described stop excitation. As a result, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped as shown in the row of "No. 5".

  The above-described excitation mode is merely an example, and the rotation speeds of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at the time of the fastest rotation and the normal rotation, that is, the drive speed of the stepping motor G31 can be set arbitrarily. However, it is desirable to set the rotational speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 in each state, that is, the driving speed of the stepping motor G31 to be in the range of 200 pps to 500 pps. By setting in this way, it is possible to reduce the risk of step-out, which is a state where the stepping motor that rotates in synchronism with the pulse loses synchronism due to a sudden speed change or overload and becomes out of synchronization with the input pulse. it can.

  Further, by setting as described above, it is possible to reduce the risk of resonance that occurs when the frequency of the input pulse matches the natural vibration frequency of the rotor. In a stepping motor, generally, there is one region in the region of 100 pps to 200 pps of the frequency of the input pulse and one region in the region of frequency higher than 500 pps to resonate. Resonance manifests itself as a sudden loss or reduction of torque at a certain speed. This causes missing steps (missteps) and loss of synchronization.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: backlash: 30 degree backlash)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150, an excitation mode during a backlash operation will be described. Here, the "backlash motion" is a motion in which the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 stop immediately after starting rotation. First, with reference to FIG. 150 (a), an explanation will be given on the excitation mode of the 30-degree play, that is, the operation of stopping the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at a position rotated by 30 degrees from the rotation start position after the rotation start. .

  As shown in the row of "No. 1," the sub CPU 102 first inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a pulse having a frequency of 250 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 by four steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rps.

  Next, as shown in the row of “No. 2”, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 for four steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 3", the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 2 ms, that is, a frequency of 500 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 by 22 steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 83.3 rpm.

Next, as shown in the row of "No. 4", the sub CPU 102 performs stop excitation. As a result, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped as shown in the row of "No. 5".
By the above excitation control of the sub CPU 102, a backlash operation is performed in which the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 stop at the position rotated by 30 degrees from the rotation start position.

(Excitation mode of stepping motor: backlash: 15 degree backlash)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150 (b), a description will be given of an excitation mode in a 15-degree backlash operation, that is, an operation in which, after the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 start rotating, the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 stop at a position rotated by 15 degrees from the rotation start position. To do.

  As shown in the row of "No. 1," the sub CPU 102 first inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 4 ms, that is, a pulse having a frequency of 250 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 by four steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 41.6 rps.

  Next, as shown in the row of “No. 2”, the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 3 ms, that is, a frequency of 333 pps to the stepping motor G31 to drive the stepping motor G31 for four steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 55.5 rpm.

  Next, as shown in the row of "No. 3", the sub CPU 102 inputs a pulse having a pulse width of 2 ms, that is, a pulse having a frequency of 500 pps to the stepping motor G31, and drives the stepping motor G31 for seven steps. The rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 at this time is 83.3 rpm.

Next, as shown in the row of "No. 4", the sub CPU 102 performs stop excitation. As a result, the driving of the stepping motor G31 and the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is stopped as shown in the row of "No. 5".
By the above excitation control of the sub CPU 102, a rattling operation is performed in which the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 stop at the position rotated by 15 degrees from the rotation start position.

  When the excitation control shown in the table of 150 (a) or (b) is set as one set, and the rotation directions are made to coincide with each other and a plurality of sets of excitation control are performed, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 rattle and intermittently move in one direction. Driving of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be controlled so that the louver plates operate in a desired manner.

  In addition, when a plurality of sets of excitation control are performed and the rotation directions are set oppositely, that is, after one set of CCW (counterclockwise) excitation control and one set of CW (clockwise) excitation control. When the operations are repeated, the driving of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be controlled so that the louver plates G13, G14, G15 reciprocate at the rotation start position.

  In addition, in the excitation control shown in FIGS. In the third row, an example in which the rotation speed of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 is controlled to 83.3 rpm has been described, but the rotation speed can be set arbitrarily. For example, the rotation speed during the normal rotation described above, that is, the rotation speed may be controlled to 55.5 rpm.

(Painting mode of fixed screen mechanism)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 151, a coating mode of the fixed screen mechanism will be described. FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining a coating mode of the fixed screen mechanism. Note that, in FIG. 151, the louver plates G13 and G14 are not shown for convenience of description.

  The shaded area in FIG. 151 is the area where the silver special color ink (ink that contains aluminum or nickel pigment etc. to give a silver metallic luster) is applied as the base, and then overlaid with the white ink. Shows.

  Specifically, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 of the louver screen G1 and the front side of the upper cover portion G9 of the louver drive mechanism G2 are coated as described above. The insides of the frame portion G23 and the curved portion G22 of the rear screen G3 (the front surfaces of the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25) are painted as described above. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism G, a portion where an image is projected and a portion which can be visually recognized by the player are coated with white ink on the above-mentioned silver base. In addition, the louver plates G13, G14, G15, the upper cover portion G9, and the rear screen G3, which are the objects of the above-mentioned painting, are molded (formed) of black resin.

[Structure of three-dimensional decoration]
Subsequently, details of the three-dimensional decoration 400 shown in FIGS. 136 and 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156.
FIG. 152 is a perspective view of a three-dimensional decoration. FIG. 153 is an exploded view of the three-dimensional decoration. FIG. 154 is an exploded view of the light transmitting member. 155 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 152. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the LED and the crystal part.
Although the three-dimensional decoration 400 and the three-dimensional decoration 500 have slightly different appearances, the three-dimensional decoration 400 will be described below and the description of the three-dimensional decoration 500 will be omitted because the constituent members, the structural features and functions are common. To do.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the three-dimensional decoration 400 includes a base body 401, an LED substrate 402, a reflector 403, a light diffusion sheet 404, a light transmission member 405, and a cover portion 406.

  The base body 401 is a vertically long substantially flat plate member, and the LED substrate 402 and the reflector 403 are fixed to the base body 401 by screws. A plurality of LEDs 410 are provided on the LED substrate 402. The LED substrate 402 covers the front surface of the base body 401.

  The reflector 403 is a vertically long substantially flat plate member and covers the front surface of the LED substrate 402. The reflector 403 is provided with exposure holes 411 corresponding to the LEDs 410 of the LED substrate 402 and exposing the LEDs in the same number as the number of installed LEDs 410. The reflector 403 is plated, and the reflector 403 reflects the light of the LED 410 exposed from the exposure hole 411 forward. On the front surface of the reflector 403, a plurality of fixing protrusions 412 that protrude forward and fix the light diffusion sheet 404 are provided.

  The light diffusion sheet 404 includes a light diffusion sheet 404a and a light diffusion sheet 404b located below the light diffusion sheet 404a. The light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b are arranged in front of the reflector 403 and cover a part of the reflector 403. The light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b are provided with a plurality of holes into which the fixed convex portions 412 of the reflector 403 are inserted. When the fixed convex portion 412 is inserted into the holes of the light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b, the light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b are fixed to the reflector 403. The light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b are irradiated from the rear side and dimming the light of the LED 410. Instead of the light diffusing sheet, or in combination with the light diffusing sheet, another light diffusing member may be provided. For example, the LED chip cavity is filled with a resin such as epoxy to form a light diffusion portion, the resin cap portion serves as an LED package, or the LED cap is separate from silicon rubber or the like. Light may be diffused by disposing a resin light diffusion cap at a position to cover the LED. Further, a lens or the like for diffusing light may be arranged as the light diffusing member.

  The light transmission member 405 is disposed in front of the reflector 403 and the light diffusion sheets 404a and 404b, and is a member formed of a material that transmits the light of the LED 410, for example, a light-transmitting colored plastic. The light transmitting member 405 is fixed to the reflector 403, the base body 401, and the cover portion 406 by the fixing convex portion 412 and the screw.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the light transmitting member 405 is composed of a plurality of members. Each member has a part that is three-dimensionally molded based on the concept related to the decoration of the game machine. Specifically, the light transmitting member 405 includes a spear portion 420 having a three-dimensionally molded portion with a spear motif, two crystal portions 421 and 422 having a three-dimensionally molded portion with a crystal motif, and a rock. It is composed of three rock parts 423, 424, and 425, which have three-dimensionally molded parts with the motif.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the spear portion 420 is arranged at the center of the light transmitting member 405. A rock part 423 is arranged above one side of the spear part 420 (upper left part of FIG. 153), and a crystal part 421 is arranged on one side of the rock part 423 (left side of FIG. 153). . Further, a rock portion 424 is arranged below one side of the spear portion 420 (lower left of FIG. 153). A crystal part 422 is arranged below the other side of the spear part 420 (lower right of FIG. 153), and a rock part 425 is arranged on the other side of the spear part 420 and the crystal part 422 (right side of FIG. 153). It is arranged. By configuring the light transmitting member 405 in this way, it is possible to give the player who sees it the impression that a spear is stuck in a rocky place where crystals are exposed in places.

  The three-dimensionally molded portions of the crystal parts 421 and 422 are in a form in which a plurality of prisms and pyramids are connected. As shown in FIGS. 153 and 155, the crystal part 421 faces the plurality of LEDs 410 via the light diffusion sheet 404a. As shown in FIG. 155, a predetermined space is formed between the light diffusion sheet 404a and a portion of the crystal portion 421 opposed to the light diffusion sheet 404a which is three-dimensionally molded into a crystal shape.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, in the crystal part 421, the part facing the LED 410 is the apex or the ridge line connecting the apexes in the part where the crystal part 421 is three-dimensionally molded. Although not shown, the positional relationship between the crystal part 422 and the LED 410 is similar.

  An outer edge portion 426 having a predetermined width is formed at an end portion on one side (the left side in FIG. 153) of the light transmitting member 405. The outer edge portion 426 is covered from the front by an inner edge portion 431 of the cover portion 406 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the cover portion 406 is a member formed in a vertically long frame shape having an opening in the center, and forms an outer frame of the three-dimensional decoration 400. An inner edge portion 431 protruding inside the opening is formed on one side frame 330 (the left side frame in FIG. 153) of the cover portion 406. As described above, the inner edge portion 431 covers the outer edge portion 426 of the light transmitting member 405 from the front. The inner edge portion 431 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions so as not to interfere with a decorative portion of the light transmitting member 405, that is, a portion that is three-dimensionally molded into a crystal, a spear, or a rock.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the other side surface 432 (the right side frame in FIG. 153) of the cover portion 406 is covered from the front by the end portion of the light transmitting member 405. That is, the inner edge portion 431 of the one side frame 430 of the cover portion 406 covers one end portion of the light transmitting member 405 from the front, while the other side surface 432 of the cover portion 406 includes the light transmitting member 405. It is covered from the front by the other end.

[Direction mode]
Subsequently, a play mode of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In order to simplify the description, only the points different from the first and second embodiments and the effects related to the display unit 200 will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102, when receiving the start command, from the time when the start command is received to the time when the winning operation command is received, that is, the player operates the start lever 6 and performs each stop operation, and a combination of symbols. Is displayed, and the effect according to the flow of the series of unit games in which a profit according to the combination of the displayed symbols is given is determined. The production consists of multiple parts. Each part corresponds to a start command (when the start lever 6 is operated), a reel stop command (when the first, second, and third stop operations are performed) and a winning operation command.

(Direction lottery table)
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, the effect lottery table used for determining the effect to be executed in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state A. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state B. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state C. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an effect lottery table used in the chance zone (CZ) and the effect state C. The data tables shown in FIGS. 157 to 160 are stored in (the memory of) the ROM cartridge substrate 76.

  In the present embodiment, when the start command is received, the sub CPU 102 selects and executes the effect lottery table to be referred to, based on the above-mentioned game state (normal game state, chance zone, etc., see FIG. 36) and effect state. Determine the target production.

The effect state indicates the state of the display unit 200, and in the present embodiment, there are three effect states: effect state A, effect state B, and effect state C.
The effect state A shows a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position (see FIG. 139), that is, a state in which an image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1. The effect state B shows a state in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position (see FIG. 22), that is, a state in which an image is projected on the reel screen mechanism F1. In the effect state C, the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position (see FIG. 20), and an image is projected on the fixed screen mechanism G.

  As shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, 20 kinds of effects are defined in the effect lottery table of the present embodiment. In any of the presentations, three numbers are displayed on each screen, these numbers are changed by the operation of the start lever 6, the numbers are changed one by one in response to each stop operation, and after the third stop operation, 3 The common feature is that a combination of two numbers is displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, in the effect lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning combination may be determined when the winning combination is “other than BB” (that is, bonus: other than “F_BB1” and “F_BB2”). There are some effects such as "No effect for A_A", "No effect for Flame_A", "No effect for Ice_A", "No effect for A_B", "No effect for Flame_B", "No effect for Ice_B", "No effect for C_C" "For use", "For effect flame_C", "For effect ice_C", and "For effect special_C" are defined. As for the contents of “For production without effect_A” to “For special effect with special_C”, the combination of the three numbers displayed after the third stop operation is the combination of the numbers suggesting that the bonus is won. The form is common in that it is not "777".

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, in the effect lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning combination may be determined when the winning combination is “BB” (that is, bonus: “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”). As effects, "For production without _777_A", "For production with flame _777_A", "For production with ice _777_A", "For production without _777_B", "For production with flame _777_B", "For production with ice _777_B", "For production without _777_C" , "Production Flame_777_C", "Production Ice_777_C", and "Production Special_777_C Only" are defined. The contents of “For production No production _777_A” to “For production special _777_C only” are the combination of the three numbers displayed after the third stop operation, “777” which is a combination of numbers that suggests that the bonus is won. Are common in that

  “Flame” in the tables shown in FIGS. 157 to 160 indicates that a flame image is displayed on the background of the displayed numbers. Further, “ice” indicates that an image of ice is displayed on the background of the displayed numbers. In addition, “none” indicates that a black background image is displayed on the background of the displayed numbers. Further, as for "special", it is indicated that the variation mode of the numbers is a special mode different from other effects. The "special" presentation mode will be described later.

  In addition, "for A" in the tables shown in Figs. 157 to 160 indicates that the effect is for the effect state A, and "for B" indicates that it is the effect for the effect state B. . Further, "for C" indicates that the effect is for the effect state C. In the present embodiment, for example, as for the effect contents of “effect flame_777_A”, “effect flame_777_B”, and “effect flame_777_C”, a flame image is displayed on the background of the displayed numbers, and The content of the effect that the combination of the three numbers displayed after the stop operation is “777” is common. However, as described above, the target to project the image by the irradiation light device B is different depending on the effect state (the front screen mechanism E1 in the effect state A, the reel screen mechanism F1 in the effect state B, and the fixed screen mechanism in the effect state C). G), it is necessary to prepare effect data (image data to be projected) according to each screen mechanism. That is, different images (sets) are prepared for each of “production flame_777_A”, “production flame_777_B”, and “production flame_777_C”.

  The sub CPU 102 sequentially subtracts the random number value for effect lottery extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values, “0 to 255” in the present embodiment, by the lottery value defined in each table, and the result of the subtraction is The lottery is carried out by determining whether or not it becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carriage" has occurred).

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state A, when the winning combination is "other than BB", "200 for effect without effect_A", "for effect flame_A" A lottery value of “40” is assigned to “40”, and a lottery value of “16” is assigned to “for production ice_A”. In addition, when the winning combination is “BB”, the lottery value of “10” is assigned to “No production _777_A”, “20” to “Production flame _777_A”, and “226” to “Production ice _777_A”. .

  Therefore, when using the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 157, effects other than effects for effect state A, that is, effects for effect state B and effect state C are not determined as effects to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state B, when the winning combination is “other than BB”, “200” for “without effect _B” and “for effect flame_B” The lottery value of “40” is assigned to “40”, and the lottery value of “16” is assigned to “for production ice_B”. When the winning combination is “BB”, the lottery value of “5” is assigned to “For production None_777_B”, “30” for “Production flame_777_B”, and “221” for “Production ice_777_B”. .

  Therefore, when using the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 158, effects other than effects for effect state B, that is, effects for effect state A and effect state C are not determined as effects to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 159, in the effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state C, when the winning combination is "other than BB", "200 for effect" and "for effect flame_C" The lottery value of “40” is assigned to “40”, and the lottery value of “16” is assigned to “for effect ice_C”. When the winning combination is “BB”, the lottery value of “15” is assigned to “for production None_777_C”, “20” for “for production Flame_777_C”, and “221” for “production of ice_777_C”. .

  Therefore, when using the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 159, effects other than effects for effect state C, that is, effects for effect state A and effect state B are not determined as effects to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the effect lottery table used in the CZ and effect state C, when the winning combination is “other than BB”, “16” is set for “without effect_C” and “for effect flame_C”. The lottery value of "200" is assigned to "40" and "for production ice_C". When the winning combination is “BB”, “15” for “No effect _777_C”, “20” for “Production flame _777_C”, “121” for “Production ice _777_C”, “Special production _777_C only” A lottery value of “100” is assigned.

  Therefore, when using the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 160, effects other than effects for effect state C, that is, effects for effect state A and effect state B, are not determined as effects to be executed.

  In addition, the lottery values are different from those of the effect lottery table used in the normal game state and the effect state C shown in FIG. 159. For example, in the table shown in FIG. 159, a lottery value of “16” is assigned to “effect ice_C” of “other than BB”, but in the table shown in FIG. 160, a lottery value of “200” is assigned to the same effect. Is allocated. For this reason, the player displays ice in the background of the numbers, and the combination of the three numbers displayed after the third stop operation is not the number combination "777" indicating that the bonus is won. When the effect is executed, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the game state is CZ, that is, that the player stays in the CZ where it is relatively easy to shift to the ART game state.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, in addition to the effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 157 to 160, the effect lottery table used in the CZ and effect state A, and the CZ and effect state B of the effect lottery table. A production lottery table used at times is also provided. In addition, for each of the other game states "normal ART" and "CT" shown in FIG. 36, a production lottery table corresponding to each production state is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, as many effect lottery tables as the number of combinations of the game state and the effect state are provided. In these effect lottery tables, lottery is performed so that effects that are inconsistent with the staying effect state are not determined (for example, in the effect state C, effects for effect state A and effect state B are not determined). It is common that the values are assigned. If the winning combination is "other than BB", "For production without _777_A", "For production flame_777_A", "For production ice_777_A", "For production without _777_B", "For production flame_777_B", "For production ice_777_B" The lottery values are assigned so that “For use”, “For effect None_777_C”, “For effect Flame_777_C”, “For effect Ice_777_C” and “For effect special_777_C” are not determined (that is, lottery is assigned to these effects. "0" is assigned as a value).

(Demonstration mode of "For production None_777_C")
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166, description will be given of an effect in the case where “for effect no effect_777_C” is determined as the effect to be executed. FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C and shows a state before the start command is received. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows the state after receiving the start command. FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows the state after the first stop operation. FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows the state after the second stop operation. FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows the state after the third stop operation. FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the effect in the effect state C, and shows a state after the winning operation command is received.

  As described above, there is a possibility that “for production without effect_777_C” may be determined as the execution target production when the production state is the production state C and the winning combination is “BB”. Further, the effect state C is a state in which the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, and an image is projected on the fixed screen mechanism G. As shown in FIG. 161, before the start command is received, the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 forming the louver screen G1 of the fixed screen mechanism G have a combination of three numbers as a result of the effect in the previous unit game. It is displayed.

  First, when the player operates the start lever 6 and the sub CPU 102 receives a start command, as shown in FIG. 162, numbers are provided at respective positions where the louver plates G13, G14, G15 of the fixed screen mechanism G are arranged. An image (which is composed of an animation, hereinafter may be referred to as a “changing image”) representing a changing state is projected. Further, the sub CPU 102 rotates the louver plates G13, G14, G15 in a predetermined direction, for example, counterclockwise when viewed from above. Since the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotating, the variation image is projected on the louver plates G13, G14, G15 and the rear screen G3.

  Next, when the player performs the first stop operation on the stop button 7L (that is, the reel 3L) and the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command, as shown in FIG. 163, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the stop button 7L. The rotation of the louver plate G13 is stopped and the number "7" is displayed on the louver plate G13. The sub CPU 102 sets the stop position of the rotation of the louver plate G13 to the above-described front origin or back origin, that is, the first surface G21a or the second surface G21b of the louver plate G13 is in the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. The drive of the louver plate G13 is controlled so as to be parallel.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 continues the rotation of the louver plate G14 and the louver plate G15, and continues to display the variable image at each position where the louver plates G14 and G15 are arranged. In addition, when the effects from “For effect no_A” to “For effect special_C only” in FIGS. 157 to 160 are determined as effects to be executed, the sub CPU 102 causes the louver board G13 to have a number other than “7”. Display the number.

  Next, when the player performs the second stop operation on the stop button 7C (that is, the reel 3C) and the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command, as shown in FIG. 164, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the stop button 7C. The rotation of the louver plate G14 is stopped, and the number "7" is displayed on the louver plate G14. The sub CPU 102 sets the stop position of the rotation of the louver plate G14 to the above-described front origin or back origin, that is, the first surface G21a or the second surface G21b of the louver plate G14 is in the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. The drive of the louver plate G14 is controlled so as to be parallel.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 continues the rotation of the louver plate G15, and continues to display the variable image at the position where the louver plate G15 is arranged. In addition, when the effects from “For effect no_A” to “For effect special_C only” in FIGS. 157 to 160 are determined as effects to be executed, the sub CPU 102 causes the louver board G14 to have a value other than “7”. To display the numbers

Next, when the player performs the third stop operation on the stop button 7R (that is, the reel 3R) and the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command, as shown in FIG. 165, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the stop button 7R. The rotation of the louver plate G15 is stopped, and the number "7" is displayed on the louver plate G15. The sub CPU 102 sets the stop position of the rotation of the louver plate G15 to the front or back origin described above, that is, the first surface G21a or the second surface G21b of the louver plate G15 is in the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. The drive of the louver plate G15 is controlled so as to be parallel. The louver plates G13, G14, and G15 that have stopped rotating are flush with each other to form a louver screen G1 having a plane parallel to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1.
In addition, when the effects from “For effect no_A” to “For effect special_C only” in FIGS. 157 to 160 are determined as effects to be executed, the sub CPU 102 causes the louver board G15 to have a value other than “7”. Display the number.

  Then, when the sub CPU 102 receives the winning operation command, the sub CPU 102 superimposes the combination of numbers displayed on the louver boards G13, G14, and G15 on "777" to emphasize the display, for example, shown in FIG. 166. To display images of shining stars. The display area of the image of the bright star extends beyond the louver screen G1 including the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, and extends to the upper cover portion G9 of the louver drive mechanism G2 and the frame portion G23 of the rear screen G3. The effect image such as the star image of this embodiment may not be projected in the frame portion 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 166, when performing the effect of notifying that the right to shift to the advantageous game state has been given, the three-dimensional decorations 400 and 500, the light emitting decoration section of the cabinet 61, the touch panel unit 200, and the waist panel. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which other predetermined light-emitting parts such as 25 and the display part are turned off and darkened to attract more attention to the effect, and in this case, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the timing to start displaying the numbers on each of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 that have stopped rotating is set to the timing at which the rotation completely stops. Note that this timing can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set before the rotation is completely stopped. For example, when the content of the detection signal output from the sensor G40 changes from the fact that the light receiving unit receives the light from the light emitting unit to the fact that it no longer receives light (that is, the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit of the sensor 40G). (When the protrusion G41 starts to intervene) may be set as the timing to start displaying the numbers.

  In the above description, the stop button 7L (or reel 3L) is associated with the louver plate G13, the stop button 7C (or reel 3C) is associated with the louver plate G14, and the stop button 7R (or reel 3R) is associated with the louver plate. A mode has been described in which G15 is associated and the corresponding louver plate is stopped in response to a stop operation on each stop button (or reel). However, the correspondence between the stop operation and the louver plate to be stopped can be set arbitrarily. For example, regardless of the target, the louver plate G15 may be stopped during the first stop operation, the louver plate G14 may be stopped during the second stop operation, and the louver plate G13 may be stopped during the third stop operation.

  As a modified example of the effect, an effect may be provided in which the operation of each louver plate is stopped based on the player operating a predetermined operation unit such as the chance button 33 or the touch panel unit 201. In this case, one operation means may be operated a plurality of times, or an operation may be accepted by a plurality of operation means. Also, when performing the same effect in a pachinko gaming machine, the operation of each louver is stopped based on the operation of so-called effect operation means (buttons, levers, jog dials, switches, etc.) and the operation detection of the player by the infrared sensor. Alternatively, the operation of each louver may be stopped based on the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, in the demonstration production that is performed in the waiting state for customers who are not playing the game, the demonstration of the above-mentioned production can be performed to promote the novel production by the movement of the louver to promote the operation of the gaming machine. . Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) capable of grasping the current date and time, the occurrence frequency of the effect is changed by changing the occurrence probability of the effect at a predetermined time or date. May promote the operation on a specific day or time.

("Special production _777_C only")
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 171, a production mode of “dedication special_777_C only” will be described as an example of a production mode of “special”. FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining a “special” effect mode, in which (a) of the louver plate at the origin is a top view and (b) is a front view. FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the “special” effect mode, in which (a) of the louver plate rotated 45 degrees from the origin is a top view, and (b) is a view seen from diagonally above. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the "special" effect mode, in which the louver plate rotated 90 degrees from the origin is a top view and (b) is a front view. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining a "special" effect mode, in which (a) of the louver plate rotated 135 degrees from the origin is a top view, and (b) is a view seen from diagonally above. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the "special" effect mode, in which (a) of the louver plate rotated 180 degrees from the origin is a top view, and (b) is a front view. 167 to 171, only one louver plate is shown, and the other louver plates are not shown. The white arrow indicates the range in which the projected image can be seen. Further, in the top view, the shaded portion indicates the second surface G21b side.

  There is a possibility that "production special_777_C exclusive use" may be determined as the production to be executed when the production state is the production state C and the winning combination is "BB". When this effect is determined, the sub CPU 102 determines, as shown in FIG. 167, that the louver is at the origin (front origin or back origin), that is, the projection plane of the image is parallel to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1. The number "7" is projected on the plates G13, G14, G15. If the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are not at the front or back origin at the start of the effect, the numeral "7" is projected after moving to the front or back origin.

  As shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, the sub CPU 102 changes the projected image in accordance with the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15. Specifically, 180 images of the contents of rotating a virtual plate having "7" written on one side thereof 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above from a state orthogonal to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1 ( The image rotated one by one) is stored in the memory of the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in advance. Further, each image is associated with the rotational position of the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. Then, when performing the effect, the sub CPU 102 reads out an image corresponding to the rotational position of the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 from the memory and displays the image. Note that, specifically, after displaying the image data for projection, which is read from the memory and processed by the sub CPU 102 and the rendering processor 104, in the VRAM 105 functioning as a frame buffer, the display is output by the projector mechanism B2. Is going.

  By repeating this, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image of the number "7" is rotating. It is preferable to display the image so that the rotation axis of the virtual plate and the rotation axes of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 coincide with each other. Further, as shown in FIG. 169, when the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are orthogonal to each other in the left-right direction, the side surface portions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are narrow. Even if the image of the number "7" is projected onto the area, it is difficult for the player to recognize the image of the number "7", and therefore the image of the number "7" is not projected. However, since the time during which the image of the number “7” is not projected is momentary, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Here, in the effect of rotating the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, a predetermined effect image, a background image, or the like may be displayed together with the number “7” image in order to enhance the sense of reality of the rotating operation. . For example, by projecting an image in which light runs in the direction of rotation, swirls occur in water, or a character dressed in figure skating spins, the sensation of rotation can be enhanced. Further, not only in the rotation operation of the louver plate, but also in other movable accessory, in accordance with the operation mode, a predetermined image related to the operation mode is projected on the movable accessory to enhance the effect of the effect. You can During the time when the image of the number "7" is not projected, the above-described effect image and background image are displayed on any or all of the side surfaces of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 and the rear screen G3. It may be one. Furthermore, a video dedicated to orthogonal timing may be provided. That is, while the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are at an angle that can be said to be orthogonal or substantially orthogonal, a predetermined side surface image is projected in a period in which the side surface portion of the louver plate is in a position that is easily visible to the player. It may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation by that. For example, by projecting a color such as blue, green, or red that indicates or informs the degree of expectation on the side surface of the louver board, even when the projected image is in an orthogonal position that is difficult to see, it is possible to perform an effect that indicates the degree of expectation. You can

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts, and the sub CPU 102 sets the number “7” at the start of the effect shown in FIG. 167. The surface on the projected side is treated as the first surface G21a and the surface on the opposite side is treated as the second surface G21b during the same production thereafter. Instead of this, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b may be formed to be distinguishable (for example, one of them may be colored), and as an absolute concept, various controls within the performance may be performed.

  In addition, instead of storing the above 180 images in the memory, the virtual plate with the number "7" written on both sides is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. The 360 images may be stored in the memory in advance in association with the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. In this case, when executing the effect, the sub CPU 102 reads out an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 from the memory and displays the image.

  Further, in the effect, an image for decorating the numbers may be displayed around the numbers displayed on the louver boards G13, G14, G15. For example, an image of ice or flame may be displayed around the number. In addition, an image serving as a background may be displayed on the upper cover portion G9 of the louver drive mechanism G2 and the frame portion G23 of the rear screen G3 during the performance execution. Further, by rotating the louver plates G13, G14, G15, an image may be displayed inside the rear screen G3 which is visible to the player. It should be noted that the image displaying the numbers and the image displayed inside the rear screen G3 are images corresponding to the rotation positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 so as to change in accordance with the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. It is desirable to prepare in advance.

  In the above example, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above. However, instead of this, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 may be rotated clockwise as viewed from above. In this case, as the image to be stored in the memory in advance, an image corresponding to the rotation direction is prepared. It should be noted that both the image corresponding to the clockwise direction and the image corresponding to the counterclockwise direction are prepared, and when the mode of the effect is randomly determined, the rotation direction is determined by the lottery, and the image corresponding to the determined rotation direction. May be displayed. Further, the degree of expectation may be changed depending on the rotation direction and the rotation speed. Furthermore, a temporary stop or a temporary stop may be performed on the way, or the rotation direction may be reversed.

(Mode of state transition)
Next, referring to FIGS. 172 to 175, an aspect of transition of the effect state will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining whether or not the effect state can be changed within the lock time. FIG. 173 shows the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state A. FIG. 174 shows the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state B. FIG. 175 shows the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state C.

  In the present embodiment, lock lottery is performed in CZ1 and CZ2 as in the second embodiment. The difference from the first and second embodiments in this embodiment is that there is a type of lock to be generated. Also, instead of changing the effect state according to the game state (switching the screen that displays the image), the effect state transition lottery is performed when the lock is generated, and the effect state is changed according to the lottery result. That is the point.

  In the present embodiment, the types of lock include “LO short lock”, “LO long lock”, “short lock after all stop”, and “long lock after all stop”. The “LO short lock” is a lock that occurs when the start lever 6 is operated and delays the start of rotation of the reel for a predetermined time A. The “LO length lock” is a lock that occurs when the start lever 6 is operated and delays the start of reel rotation for a predetermined time B that is longer than the predetermined time A.

  Further, the "short lock after all stop" is a lock that occurs after the third stop operation and invalidates the closing operation for the next unit game for a predetermined time A. The “long lock after all stop” is a lock that occurs after the third stop operation and invalidates the input operation for the next unit game for a predetermined time B that is longer than the predetermined time A.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock lottery results in the lock lottery, the main control board 71 further determines the lock type by lottery. A known lottery method can be appropriately adopted as the lottery method for the lock type. For example, a lottery value is assigned to each lock type in advance, and the lottery value assigned to each lock type is sequentially subtracted by the random number for lottery acquired at the time of lottery, and the result of the subtraction becomes negative. You may decide the lottery result. Then, the main control board 71 sends a command including information on the lock type determined as a result of the lottery to the sub control board 42.

  Upon receiving the command, the sub CPU 102 uses the effect state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 173 to 175) according to the effect state to stay, and performs effect state transition lottery. “None” in FIGS. 173 to 175 means that the effect state is not transited. Further, in FIG. 173, “A → B” means a transition from the effect state A to the effect state B, and “A → C” means a transition from the effect state A to the effect state C. In FIG. 174, “B → A” means a transition from the effect state B to the effect state A, and “B → C” means a transition from the effect state B to the effect state C. In FIG. 175, “C → A” means a transition from the effect state C to the effect state A, and “C → B” means a transition from the effect state C to the effect state B.

  At the time of the effect state transition lottery, the sub CPU 102 first selects the effect state transition lottery table according to the staying effect state. In addition, the random number for lottery extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 255” is acquired. Then, the obtained random number for lottery is selected for each lock mode indicated by the command received from the main control board 71 in the selected table for each transition mode of the effect state (the above-mentioned “none”, “A → B”, etc.). The lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the specified lottery value and determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called "carriage" has occurred) (the transition mode that becomes negative is Determined as a lottery result).

  Here, in the transition from the effect state A to the effect state C, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front exposure position to the front standby position. In the transition from the effect state B to the effect state C, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position.

  Further, in the transition from the effect state C to the effect state A, the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position to the front exposed position. In the transition from the effect state C to the effect state B, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position.

  On the other hand, in the transition from the production state A to the production state B, it is necessary to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position and to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. There is. If these movements are performed at the same time, the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 come into contact with each other during movement, and the movement cannot be completed. Therefore, it is necessary to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position and then move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position.

  Further, in the transition from the effect state B to the effect state A, it is necessary to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position and to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. is there. If these movements are performed at the same time, these screen mechanisms E1, F1 will come into contact during movement. Therefore, it is necessary to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position and then move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position.

  Therefore, the transition from the production state A to the production state B and the transition from the output state B to the production state A are longer than the time required for the other transition modes described above (that is, the transitions involving the production state C). Requires.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined time B relating to the “LO length lock” and the “long lock after all stop” described above is changed from the effect state A to the effect state B and from the exit state B to the effect state A. It is set longer than the time required for. Further, the predetermined time A related to the “LO short lock” and the “short lock after all stop” is shorter than the time required for the transition from the effect state A to the effect state B and the transition from the exit state B to the effect state A, In addition, the time required for the transition from the effect state A or effect state B to the effect state C, and the time required for the transition from the effect state C to the effect state A or the effect state B are set.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 172, within the time of “short lock”, that is, “LO short lock” and “short lock after all stop”, the transition from the production state A to the production state B and the transition from the output state B to the production state A are performed. The transition of is impossible.

  Therefore, in the effect state transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 173 to 175, when the “LO short lock” and the “short lock after all stop” occur, the transition from the effect state A to the effect state B and the output state B to the effect state A are performed. A lottery value is assigned so that the transition to is not won.

  Specifically, in the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state A shown in FIG. 173, “128” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “none” for “LO short lock”, and the transition mode “ “0” is defined as the lottery value of “A → B”, and “128” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “A → C”. Further, for "short lock after all stops", "200" is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode "None", "0" is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode "A → B", and the transition mode " “56” is defined as the lottery value for “A → C”.

  That is, when "LO short lock" and "short lock after all stops" occur in the effect state A, the transition from the effect state A to the effect state B is not determined as the transition mode. Note that, in FIG. 173, with respect to “LO length lock” and “long lock after all stop”, one or more lottery values are assigned to various transition modes.

  Further, in the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state B shown in FIG. 174, “128” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “none” for “LO short lock”, and the transition mode “B → A”. “0” is defined as the lottery value of “”, and “128” is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode “B → C”. Further, for "short lock after all stops", "200" is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode "None", "0" is defined as the lottery value of the transition mode "B → A", and the transition mode " “56” is defined as the lottery value of “B → C”.

  That is, when "LO short lock" and "short lock after all stops" occur in the rendering state B, the transition from the rendering state B to the rendering state A is not determined as the transition mode. In FIG. 174, with respect to “LO length lock” and “long lock after all stop”, one or more lottery values are assigned to various transition modes.

  Note that in the effect state transition lottery table used in the effect state C shown in FIG. 175, one or more lottery values are assigned to various transition modes in each lock type.

  As described above, in the effect state transition lottery tables shown in FIGS. 173 to 175, when the “LO short lock” and the “short lock after all stop” occur, the transition from the effect state A to the effect state B and from the effect state B are performed. The transition to the presentation state A is prevented from winning. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the transition of the effect state is not completed even though the lock is released and the start timing of the effect is delayed in the changed effect state. In addition, in a period in which the stop operation of the stop buttons 7A, 7B, 7C for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is impossible, the operation of the movable accessory such as the front screen mechanism E1 is completed, so that the stop operation will be performed. It is possible to prevent the player's concentration from being hindered by an effect using a movable accessory that has a large visual impact, and an erroneous operation. Further, when a movable accessory that affects the visibility of the display unit such as the front screen mechanism E1 operates at a timing at which it can be stopped, the appearance of the navigation mode (see FIGS. 116 and 117) changes abruptly. Since it may be difficult to recognize and the operation may be erroneous, there is an effect that such erroneous operation can be suppressed by completing the operation of the movable accessory while the lock is being performed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of the lock is associated with the winning combination, the sub CPU 102 may determine the lock type by looking at the command including the information of the winning combination. Also, the type of lock may be simplified so that only the lock time differs. In this case, the main control board 71 transmits a command including only the lock time information, and the sub CPU 102 determines the lock type based on the lock time information included in the command. Further, while the lock is occurring, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R perform reel action effects such as reverse rotation, rotation within a predetermined range, one or more pauses, low speed rotation, high speed rotation, etc. It may be possible to give a suggestion or inform the advantageous game state, and to enhance the interest of the game by performing an action of operating a movable accessory such as the front screen mechanism E1 in a manner linked to the reel action effect.

(First modification)
Subsequently, a first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 176. The first modified example relates to an effect using the louver screen G1.
FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the effect using the louver screen, (a) is a front view of the louver plate at the origin, and (b) is a front view of the louver plate rotated 45 degrees from the origin. It is a figure, (c) is a front view of the louver board rotated 90 degrees from the origin, (d) is a front view of the louver board rotated 135 degrees from the origin, and (e) is 180 degrees rotated from the origin. It is a front view of the louver board which did. Note that, in FIG. 176, only one louver plate is shown and the other louver plates are omitted. The shaded portion indicates the second surface G21b side. Also in this modification, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts.

  In the description of the above-described production mode of "production special_777_C only", the mode in which the image of the number "7" that changes according to rotation is displayed on the rotating louver plates G13, G14, G15 has been described. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 176, an image of "○" is displayed on the first surface G21a that is one surface, and an image of "x" is displayed on the second surface G21b that is the other surface. May be displayed, and an image mode in which these “◯” and “×” images are displayed on the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 while being changed according to the rotation may be displayed.

  In this case, 360 images with the contents of rotating a virtual plate with "○" written on one side and "x" on the other side 360 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above are displayed. , Are stored in advance in the memory of the ROM cartridge board 76 in association with the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15. Then, when performing the effect, the sub CPU 102 reads out an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 from the memory and displays the image, as shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to (e).

(Second modified example)
Subsequently, a second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 177. The second modified example relates to an effect using the louver screen G1.
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the second modified example of the effect using the louver screen, (a) is a front view and a top view of the louver screen and the rear screen at the origin, and (b) is the origin. It is a front view and a top view of a louver screen and a rear screen which are rotated by 90 degrees from, and (c) is a front view and a top view of a louver screen and a rear screen which are rotated by 180 degrees from the origin. Note that, in FIG. 177, only one louver plate is shown, and the other louver plates are not shown. Further, in FIG. 177, the rear screen G3 is shown in a simplified manner. The shaded portion indicates the second surface G21b side. Also in this modification, the first surface G21a and the second surface G21b are relative concepts.

  In the description of the above-described production mode of "production special_777_C only", the mode in which the image of the number "7" that changes according to rotation is displayed on the rotating louver plates G13, G14, G15 has been described. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 177, an image including characters "○" and "around" is displayed on the first surface G21a, which is one surface, and the second surface, which is the other surface, is displayed. An image including the characters "?" And "Chance" is displayed on G21b, and an image including the characters "○" and "Right" and an image including the characters "?" And "Chance" are displayed as louvers. The plates G13, G14, and G15 may employ an effect mode in which they are changed according to the rotation.

  In this case, a virtual plate with "○" and "around" written on one side and "?" And "chance" on the other side is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. The 360 images of the contents to be made correspond to the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 and are stored in advance in the memory of the ROM cartridge board 76. Then, when performing the effect, the sub CPU 102 reads out an image corresponding to the rotational position of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 from the memory and displays the image.

  In addition, in this effect, by rotating the louver plates G13, G14, and G15, an image including the characters "x" and "Zannen" is displayed inside the rear screen G3 that is visible to the player. It should be noted that the image containing the characters “x” and “Zan-nen” displayed on the inside of the rear screen G3 changes its appearance in accordance with the rotation of the louver plates G13, G14, G15, and the memory of the ROM cartridge board 76. First, images corresponding to the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are prepared. For example, when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are in the rotational position rotated by 45 degrees from the origin, the area inside the rear screen G3 that can be visually recognized by the player is narrower than that shown in FIG. 177 (b). ing. Therefore, an image including the characters "X" and "Zannanen" that can be displayed in the area inside the narrowed rear screen G3 (the outer end of "x" and "Zan" and "Zannnen"). Image containing the word Note that, in FIG. 177 (b), no image is projected on the side surface of the louver plates G13, G14, G15, but here, the image of the portion where the central line of the "x" crosses is displayed on the side surface. Alternatively, the display of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 and the display of the rear screen G3 may be combined to display "x". Thus, the predetermined image can be displayed so that the player can recognize the predetermined identification information by the first image projected on the louver plates G13, G14, G15 and the second image projected on the rear screen G3. It is possible to increase the variety of display effects.

(Third Modification)
Subsequently, a third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. The third modified example relates to an effect of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.
178 shows a side view of the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the first movement position, and FIG. 178 shows a front view of the front screen mechanism E1. 179 shows a side view of the display unit 200 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the second movement position, and a front view of the front screen mechanism E1 when (b) is shown. 180A shows a side view of the display unit 200 and FIG. 180B shows a front view of the front screen mechanism E1 when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the screen exposure position. FIG. 181 shows another example of the image displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. Note that the display unit 200 is illustrated in a simplified manner in FIGS. 178 to 180.

  In the above example, the movable mode of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is determined by the accessory data table shown in FIG. 79, and the front exposure position (see FIGS. 21 and 139) and the reel exposure position (see FIG. 22). ), The image projected from the irradiation light device B is displayed. However, in this modification, the display of images is started on the front screen mechanism E1 while the front screen mechanism E1 is moving from the front standby position to the front exposure position, and when the reel screen mechanism F1 is moving from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. This is different from the above example. It should be noted that, in the feature that the display of the image is started during the movement, the case where the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 and the case where the image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other except that the object to display the image is different. It is the same. Therefore, hereinafter, the case of displaying an image on the front screen mechanism E1 will be described, and the description of the case of displaying an image on the reel screen mechanism F1 will be omitted.

  In the present modification, when the above-described effect state B, that is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position (see FIG. 22), the sub CPU 102 changes the effect state to the effect state A. When the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position. Then, after that, the sub CPU 102 starts moving the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position.

  Further, when the above-mentioned effect state C, that is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front standby position (see FIG. 20), the sub CPU 102 shifts the effect state to the effect state A. When displaying an image on the front screen mechanism E1, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 to the front exposure position is started.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), when the front screen mechanism E1 reaches the preset first movement position, the sub CPU 102 projects an image on the irradiation light device B onto the moving front screen mechanism E1. To start. That is, the moving front screen mechanism E1 is caused to start displaying an image. The first movement position can be set to any position.

  In the present modification, the image displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 is an image composed of the characters "CHANCE" and an elliptical effect image, as shown in FIG. 178 (b). The sub CPU 102 displays an image in a range of the front screen mechanism E1 which is visible to the player.

  The range of the front screen mechanism E1 that can be visually recognized by the player changes so as to gradually expand as the front screen mechanism E1 approaches the front exposed position. The sub CPU 102 changes the size and position of the image to be displayed according to the change of the visible range of the player. On the ROM cartridge board 76, an image having a size corresponding to a moving angle or speed estimated from control data of a motor for controlling the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 shown in FIG. 79 is prepared and stored in advance. The sub CPU 102 reads out an image corresponding to the position of the front screen mechanism E1 (that is, a range visible to the player) from the stored images and displays the image. The projection position of the image is controlled by the control data of the motor so that the image is projected onto a virtual visible area when the front screen mechanism E1 is moved. The projection position is defined by the projection position data. The virtual visible area corresponding to the operation sequence may be stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in advance as projection position data, and the projection position data corresponding to the operation sequence of the accessory to be executed may be called. Further, the sub CPU 102 may calculate the projection position data by performing a real-time operation of moving the projection target model in accordance with the operation sequence in the virtual space in the drawing process.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the second movement position that is closer to the front exposure position than the first movement position as shown in FIG. 179 (a), as shown in FIG. On the mechanism E1, an image having the same content as the image displayed at the first movement position (see FIG. 178 (b)) but having a large vertical size is displayed.

  When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position as shown in FIG. 180 (a), the front screen mechanism E1 has a first moving position and a second moving position as shown in FIG. 180 (b). Although the content is similar to the image displayed in (see FIG. 178 (b) and FIG. 179 (b)), an image having a large vertical size is displayed.

  Here, when no image is displayed on the moving front screen mechanism E1 as in this modification, the white front screen mechanism E1 descends to the front exposure position as it is. For this reason, the functional ruggedness of the accessory molding stands out. In addition, the player may be given the impression that the production is delayed until the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is completed, that is, the production is delayed. As a result, the tempo of the production may be deteriorated and the interest of the game may be diminished.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, since projection on the movable accessory is started during the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 (movable accessory), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, the image projected during the movement changes so as to become larger in accordance with the expansion of the range visible to the player in accordance with the movement of the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to execute a powerful effect in which the movement of the movable accessory and the change in the image are combined.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), in the front screen mechanism E1 at the first movement position, since the backward tilt angle is large, it is difficult to focus, and it is difficult to clearly display the entire image to be displayed. . However, if the image can be displayed to the extent that the player can understand the content of the displayed image, there is no problem in terms of performance even if the image is slightly out of focus. Further, by taking such a situation as an opposite hand, it is possible to intentionally display the image unclearly at the first movement position and display the image more clearly as it approaches the front exposure position from the first movement position.

  Further, the image to be displayed may be further changed after the front screen mechanism E1 arrives at the front exposure position, that is, after the state shown in FIG. 180. Further, an image having the same content may be displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 which has moved to the subsequent moving position and has arrived at the front exposure position, while maintaining the size of the image displayed at the first moving position.

  Further, instead of the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to 180 (b), the images shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c) may be displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 at the corresponding positions. The effects related to the images shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c) are effects that suggest higher expectations than the above effects related to the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to 180 (b). There is. In this effect, at the first movement position (see FIG. 178 (a)), from the character “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 181 (a) and the elliptical effect image similar to the image shown in FIG. 178 (b). The following image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. In addition, at the second movement position (see FIG. 179 (a)), in addition to the characters "CHANCE" and the elliptical effect image shown in FIG. 181 (b), a part of the characters "SUPER" and the lightning effect are added. An image consisting of a part of the image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1.

  Then, at the front exposure position (FIG. 180 (a)), the image composed of the characters “SUPER” and the lightning effect image and the characters “CHANCE” and the elliptical effect image shown in FIG. 181 (c) are displayed. , Is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. The image to be displayed may be further changed from this state.

  By preparing both the effect related to the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to 180 (b) and the effect related to the images shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c), the player can move the first moving position. In FIG. 180, even if the images shown in FIGS. 178 (b) and 181 (a) are displayed, the image shown in FIG. 180 (b) is finally displayed or the image shown in FIG. 181 (c) is unknown. . Therefore, the player pays attention to the subsequent change in the effect, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. That is, in the effect that changes according to the movement of the movable accessory (the front screen mechanism E1), the same display is displayed at the first movement position, but after that, it is possible to generate a plurality of effect patterns, so that the entertainment of the game is increased. Can be increased.

The first movement position at which the display of the image is started can be any timing from the start of movement of the front screen mechanism E1 to the completion of movement, depending on the content of the effect.
Further, the operation pattern is not limited to the effect of moving in the order of the front standby position, the first movement position, the second movement position, and the front exposure position, and any movement pattern can be used. For example, after moving from the front standby position to an arbitrary movement position, once returning to the front standby position, reciprocating between a plurality of movement positions, pausing once or plural times at the movement position, The operation pattern may be such that it vibrates at the position, and any operation pattern that can be controlled by a drive source such as a motor may be used.

  The position at which the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is stopped is not limited to the front exposure position, and can be set to any position. In this case, the display of the image is started at an arbitrary timing in the middle of the operation pattern without waiting for the completion of the movement (displacement) from the movement start point to the arbitrarily set stop position.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 may be operated or image display may be started based on the operation status of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the effect operation means (chance button 33). For example, when any one of the stop buttons is first operated (during the first stop operation), the front screen mechanism E1 starts moving, and until the movement is stopped, an image is displayed when the effect operation means is operated. The effect may be that the display is started, and the image may not be displayed when the effect operation means is not operated.

  Further, the projection target, that is, the target for displaying an image is not limited to a screen-shaped object such as the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 and can be any movable accessory. For example, a movable accessory having a shape imitating a predetermined character or motif can be used. Further, the movable accessory is not limited to one, and when a plurality of movable accessory is provided, an image may be displayed on all or a part of them, or an image may be displayed across the movable accessory and the fixed member. You may. For example, when there are a fixed member and a movable accessory as an object for displaying an image, the characters "CHANGE" are displayed on the fixed member first, and then the movable accessory is moved at an arbitrary timing during the movement. By displaying the characters "SUPER" and moving the movable accessory, the player can recognize the characters "SUPER" and "CHANCE" by combining the display of the fixed member and the movable accessory. It can be carried out. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

  In controlling the projected image, the sequence of projection is determined based on the sequence number of the accessory shown in FIG. 79. Here, when the situation in which the movable accessory is broken and does not move is grasped by the detection situation of the front exposure position sensor E15b, the front standby position sensor E15a, etc., the insurance image simulating the movable accessory is projected on the projectable area. May be projected together with the effect image. By providing an insurance effect that allows the player to know what kind of movement the movable accessory is accompanied by, it is not necessary to stop the game due to a malfunction of the movable accessory, thus suppressing a decrease in operation. it can.

  Further, the contents of the effect using the projected image and the movable accessory are not limited to the above-described example of the effect, and can be any predetermined display. For example, suggestion of gaming state, suggestion or notification of winning expectation of advantageous state such as ART or bonus, suggestion of winning combination, background image not simply associated with expectation, or premium image seen only when certain conditions are met Alternatively, a two-dimensional code that can be read by the camera of the mobile terminal may be projected. The animation is not limited to characters and effects, and may be a still image of a character or animation with movement.

  In this modification, the effect when the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front standby position to the front exposure position has been described. However, when returning from the front exposure position to the front standby position, the image is displayed at an arbitrary timing during movement. The presentation may be started. In this case, since the image is displayed while the visibility of the front screen mechanism E1 (movable accessory) to be projected by the player is decreasing, the image to be shown for a moment or the next projection target is suggested. The image may be displayed.

  In this case, for example, after defeating the front screen mechanism E1 in the front exposure position in the battle effect, an image suggesting a revival may be displayed while the front screen mechanism E1 is moving until it returns to the front standby position. . Then, after the front screen mechanism E1 has returned to the front standby position, it is possible to perform the revived victory effect.

  Further, it is also possible to display a connection image and the like until switching to the next projection target. For example, as the stage shifts from the rural stage (first stage) where the movable accessory is produced at the exposed position to the city stage (second stage) where the movable accessory is produced at the standby position, the movable accessory moves. When moving an accessory from the exposed position to the standby position, projecting an image of the means of moving toward the city such as a train or an airplane on a moving movable accessory allows you to draw a deeper view of the world of the work, making the entertainment interesting. Has the effect of increasing. The front screen mechanism E1 (first movable accessory) is returned from the front exposure position to the front standby position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 (second movable accessory) is moved from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position. Even in the movement for switching the movable accessory to be performed, by performing the projection during any movement or the entire movement, it is possible to suppress the feeling of delay in the effect of being kept waiting by the switching.

  When performing a projection effect using a movable accessory in a pachinko game machine (including an enclosed game machine in which game balls are enclosed, and a managed game machine that can be managed using a management frame common to multiple manufacturers), There is no suggestion of expectation or notification of specific game state such as big hit or small hit, probability variation state, high base state by so-called electric support, transition to special game state such as small hit rush state with frequent small hits An image for notification may be projected. In addition, even if a so-called hold image is projected and displayed on the movable accessory, and the expectation of hitting the hold is changed before or during the change of the hold, the look-ahead hold change or the hold change of the change is performed. Good. Further, in these cases, the effect that can be executed within the variable effectable time may be determined based on the information of the variable display pattern that sets the variable time of the special figure.

  Further, when the invention according to this modification is adopted in a pachinko game machine, a pseudo game ball may be displayed on the projected image in the rolling area of the movable accessory or the game ball. In the conventional Pachinko game machine, the rolling area of the actual game ball was limited by the game nails and the center frame, but in the pseudo game ball, a movable accessory or a liquid crystal display that can be projected by increasing the brightness Since the projected image can be displayed on, for example, it is possible to entertain the effect peculiar to the projector. For example, by mounting a movable accessory that reproduces an old honey machine that can not be installed under the current rules (pachinko machine that becomes a big hit with a specific area winning), by using a pseudo ball of the projected image instead of the actual game ball, It is also possible to perform an effect that reproduces the former game nature.

  Further, the contents shown in the third modification may be adopted in the pachi-slot machine according to the first and second embodiments.

(Other modifications)
In each example of the above-mentioned effects (including the modified example), the example in which the three louver plates G13, G14, G15 are used has been described, but one or two of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are used. Then, the above-mentioned effect may be performed. For example, the left and right louver plates G13 and G15 may be stopped at the origin position and only the central louver plate G14 may be rotated.

  Further, for example, at a position where the louver plate G14 is rotated by 90 degrees from the origin, different small wins are suggested in the left region and the right region with the louver plate G14 of the rear screen G3 visible to the player being sandwiched therebetween. An image (one of them is an image suggesting a small winning combination in the unit game) is displayed, and the louver board G14 is finally stopped at the origin position after the third stop operation, and the louver board G14 at the origin position is displayed. Alternatively, only the image of the winning combination may be displayed.

  In addition, the rattling operation described above may be performed at an arbitrary timing such as when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 start to rotate or when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are projected on the louver plates G13, G14, and G15.

  Up to now, basically the louver boards G13, G14, G15 are used as display portions for numerical designs and ◯? Although the effect of displaying the identification information regarding the game such as the above has been described, the effect of using the rear screen G3 as a basic display unit and using the louver plate as the shielding unit that shields the display of the rear screen G3 may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the louver plates are once rotated to orthogonal positions, and unlike in FIG. 177 (b), “o” and “around”, which mean a hit, are projected on the rear screen G3. Next, the louver plate is rotated, and at a timing when the louver is at a rotation position where the rear screen G3 can be visually recognized, “◯” and “win” are projected on the rear screen G3. When the louver plate stops at a shielding position such as parallel to shield the rear screen G3, the louver plate stops at a non-shielding position where the rear screen G3 is visible, such as a louver plate at an orthogonal position, and "O" on the rear screen G3. , When the "hit" becomes visible, a series of effects such as a hit can be performed. As described above, when the louver plate is used as the shielding portion, it is not necessary to project an image on the louver plate, but the louver plate shields the rear screen G3 such as an image with a wall or a shutter as a motif. An image that is easy to understand may be projected. The effect of using the role of the louver board as the display unit and the effect of using the shielding unit may both be provided, or only one of the effects may be performed. In the above-mentioned example, “O” and “hit” are displayed on the rear screen G3, but if the identification information is related to the game, what kind of information such as a game state suggestion or notification, an internal winning combination suggestion or notification is given. You may display things.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 having a substantially rectangular flat plate shape have been described, but the shapes of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be set arbitrarily. For example, a circular or semi-circular louver plate may be adopted.
Moreover, you may widen the clearance gap between each louver board. Then, a vertically long flat plate-like member extending downward from the upper frame portion G29 may be interposed in the expanded gap. In this case, the vertically long flat plate-shaped member interposed between the louver plates functions as a fixed screen.

Further, instead of the side plate portion G25 of the rear screen G3, a side plate portion having a linear cross section, that is, a non-curved side plate portion may be provided.
Further, the installation of the rear screen G3 may be omitted. In this case, the color of the inner wall of the screen housing C10 behind the louver plates G13, G14, G15 may be black so that the projected image is not displayed (so as not to be displayed).

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the motor G31 is provided for each of the louver plates G13, G14, G15, and each motor can operate independently. However, one motor can operate a plurality of louver plates. You may
Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by 360 degrees or more has been described, but the rotation angle may be limited. In this case, a part of one louver plate may be overlapped with a part of the other louver plate so as to be arranged in a blind shape.

  Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the game machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine according to the present invention uses a game ball as a game medium. A slot machine used as a slot machine, a pachinko machine using a game ball, an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium and assigns a game value by electronic data, and can be commonly used and managed by multiple manufacturers. The present invention can be applied to other game machines such as a game machine called a management game machine in which a management frame is used and a game board (a so-called pachinko machine panel) can be mounted in the management frame.

[Operation and effect of the third embodiment]
(First effect)
In the display unit 200 according to the present embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 139), the reel screen mechanism F1 (FIGS. 22 and 139), the louver screen G1 (louver plates G13, G14, G15) in the fixed screen mechanism G, An image can be projected on the four screens of the rear screen G3 when the louver plates G13, G14, G15 are rotated.
Therefore, various screens can be provided by using these screens, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Second effect)
The effect of the rear screen G3 will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the present embodiment and shows a mode in which an image is displayed on the rear screen. In FIG. 182, the rotating louver plates G13, G14, G15 are not shown.

  The rear screen G3 includes a rear plate portion G24 that is curved with a predetermined curvature, and a curved portion G22 that is formed by side plate portions G25 that are continuous at both ends thereof, and the side plate portion G25 is curved with a predetermined curvature. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182, when the background image of the flame is displayed on the rear screen G3 when the louver plates G13, G14, and G15 are rotated, the side plate portion that is not curved and has a linear cross section is formed. The distortion of the image at the boundary between the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25 is less noticeable than in the case where the image is provided. Therefore, it is possible to display a continuous image across the rear plate portion G24 and the side plate portion G25 without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

(Third action effect)
As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, a stepping motor G31 is arranged behind the rear screen G3. The rear of the rear screen G3 is a place that is not visible to the player, and is suitable for arranging a motor and wiring (harness). By disposing the stepping motor G31 on the rear side of the rear screen G3, it is possible to secure a disposition place for the reel unit, other substrates, a power supply box, etc. below the display unit 200. In this way, by providing a space in which a predetermined member can be arranged in a non-projection area where the projection light is shielded such as the back of the projection target and an area that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the degree of freedom in designing the member arrangement of the gaming machine is increased. Can be increased. It should be noted that a predetermined position such as a side may be used as the member arranging space as well as behind the projection target as long as it is a region where the projection light is shielded and visible to the player.

(Fourth effect)
The shaded portions in FIG. 151, that is, the spots where the image is projected and the spots visible to the player in the fixed screen mechanism G are coated with white ink on the above-described silver base. . By coating in this way, the reflection efficiency of the painted portion is increased, and the tint of the projected image becomes vivid. Further, the appearance of the fixed screen mechanism G itself for the player is improved.

  In addition, the louver plates G13, G14, G15, the upper cover portion G9, and the rear screen G3, which are the objects of the above-mentioned painting, are molded (formed) of black resin. For this reason, in the above-mentioned painting work, it becomes easy to find a portion where the coating is forgotten or a portion where the coating is uneven. This makes it possible to appropriately deal with coating leakage and coating unevenness. Further, since the above-mentioned portion where the coating is not performed remains black, it can function as a light stop, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member that shields light. By molding the modeled object to be painted with a color different from the paint color such as black resin, it is easy to find unpainted residue and uneven coating during painting, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of painting work. In addition, when the paint is partly peeled off over time due to the influence of the movement mode of the movable accessory such as the rotation of the louver plate, it will be noticeable if the black color is exposed in the white paint. This also has the effect of facilitating maintenance confirmation work. The same applies to the case where the shaped article is molded using a resin of another color having a high light-shielding property such as dark blue or dark gray instead of completely black.

(Fifth operation effect)
The sub CPU 102 detects the rotational positions of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 using the two protrusions G41 (see FIGS. 145 and 146) of the louver drive gear G33 and the sensor G40 that detects the protrusions G41. Control the rotation. Therefore, compared with the case where the rotation control is performed using one protrusion, the rotation position of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be detected more accurately, and the rotation control of the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be performed. It can be performed more accurately.

  When one protrusion G41 of the louver drive gear G33 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensor G40 (that is, when the sensor G40 detects the protrusion G41), the louver plates G13, G14, G15. However, it becomes parallel to the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1 (that is, parallel to the player). Therefore, the louver plates G13, G14, G15 can be accurately positioned in parallel with the player, and the image projected from the irradiation light device B can be appropriately displayed.

(Sixth operation effect)
As shown in FIG. 155, a predetermined space is formed between the light diffusion sheet 404a and a portion of the crystal portion 421 opposed to the light diffusion sheet 404a which is three-dimensionally molded into a crystal shape. This improves the appearance when the crystal unit 421 is irradiated with the light modulated by the light diffusion sheet 404a. Further, since it becomes difficult to grasp the shape of the LED 410 from the light transmitted from the crystal part 421, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling (so-called LED crushing feeling) felt when the light is emitted from the plurality of LEDs. Further, not only when the light diffusion sheet is provided, but even when the diffusion sheet is not provided, from the player's point of view, the apex or ridgeline of the crystal part 421 is located in front of the LED 410, so that the position of the LED is the player. Since it becomes difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress deterioration in designability as compared with the case where the LED is fully visible and the position is easily known. In addition, although the embodiment is a three-dimensional decoration imitating a crystal, when the three-dimensional decoration other than the crystal shape is used for a three-dimensional decoration having a plurality of vertices or ridges, LEDs can be arranged behind the vertices or ridges. Similarly, the effect of making the position of the LED difficult to understand can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, in the crystal part 421, the part facing the LED 410 is the apex or the ridge line connecting the apexes in the part where the crystal part 421 is three-dimensionally molded. As a result, the light of the LED 410 mainly hits the vertices and ridges of the crystal part 421, and these parts appear to be bright. For this reason, it is possible to express light emission with a texture like a crystal.

(Seventh effect)
The sub CPU 102 selects the effect lottery table (FIG. 157 to FIG. 160) to refer to based on the game state (normal game state, chance zone, etc., refer to FIG. 36) and the effect state, and based on the winning combination, the execution target. Determine the production of. That is, the effect to be executed is determined based on the game state, the effect state, and the winning combination.

Therefore, while using the four screens of the front screen mechanism E1, the reel screen mechanism F1, the louver screen G1, and the rear screen G3, a variety of effects are provided, and inconsistent with the effect state (that is, the state of these screens). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the effect. For example, it is possible to prevent an effect of projecting an image on the louver screen G1 (louver plates G13, G14, G15) when the effect state A, that is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position.
With this, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect.

(Eighth effect)
Like the effects shown in FIGS. 161 to 166, the effects shown in FIGS. 167 to 171, and the effects shown in various modified examples (see FIGS. 176 and 177), the louver plates G13, G14, which configure the louver screen G1 ,. It is possible to provide a wide variety of effects in which G15 and stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are associated with each other. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Summary of Invention]
In a gaming machine that drives a movable accessory for performance by using accessory driving means such as a motor as described in JP-A-2014-108148, the movable accessory is in a stopped state. However, when the movable accessory is stopped while the accessory drive means is excited, there is a problem that the accessory drive means deteriorates with age.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, reel screen mechanism F1), an accessory driving unit (for example, drive motor F21) for driving the movable accessory, and a drive for controlling the accessory driving unit. Control means (sub-CPU 102), the movable accessory can be stopped without exciting the accessory driving means, and an excitation stop position that can be stopped by exciting the accessory driving means. The drive control means starts the timing of the excitation stop time with the control of the accessory drive means so as to stop the movable accessory at the excitation stop position, and stops the excitation. Upon the elapse of a specified time (for example, 65000 ms), the accessory driving means is controlled so as to move the movable accessory to the stationary position, and the movable accessory moves to the stationary position. The won game drive means a predetermined time (the motor control direction "H", 100 ms) after excitation stop and has a configuration for controlling the won game drive means in a non-excited state.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the state in which the movable accessory is stopped while the accessory driving means is excited does not elapse for a predetermined time or more, so that the deterioration of the accessory driving means over time progresses. Can be suppressed. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can suppress a failure due to the progress of deterioration over time of the accessory driving means.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing an effect including movement of the movable accessory, and the stationary position includes a first stationary position (for example, a reel standby position) and When the drive control means controls the accessory driving means so as to move the movable accessory to the stationary position, the effect executing means is a second stationary position (for example, a reel exposure position). Depending on the effect being executed, the movable accessory may be moved to the first stationary position or the second stationary position, and the effect by the movable accessory may be ended.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable accessory is moved to the stationary position, the movable accessory is moved to the first stationary position or the second stationary position according to the effect being executed. Since the effect by the movable accessory is ended, the effect being executed can be ended without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-240459, in which the image projected from the projection device is displayed on the screen device, performance is performed by switching a plurality of screens having different shapes, Can be diversified.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, when an error image representing an error related to the gaming machine is displayed on the screen, since the shapes of the plurality of screens are different from each other, the error image to be displayed and the projected screen are different from each other. However, there is a problem that the visibility of the error image may be deteriorated due to the lack of meshing.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output unit (projector mechanism B2) for outputting a video, and a plurality of display devices (fixed screen mechanism D, which is movable at least one capable of displaying the video output by the video output unit). A game machine having a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1), and display control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the video output means and the plurality of display devices, the display control means comprising: Error detection means (for example, 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74) for detecting an error relating to the gaming machine, and display device specifying means (sub CPU 102) for specifying the display device on which the video output by the video output means is displayed. When the error is detected by the error detecting unit, the error detecting unit detects the error. Error display means (error display processing executed by the sub CPU 102) for displaying an error image representing the detected error on any of the plurality of display devices, wherein the display control means is configured by the display device specifying means. An error image corresponding to the specified display device is output to the image output means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is triggered by the detection of an error related to the gaming machine, and an error corresponding to the display device in which the image output by the image output means is displayed among the plurality of display devices. Since the image is output to the image output means, the visibility of the error image can be improved.

  The game machine according to the present invention further includes an error image storage unit (ROM cartridge board 76) for storing error images corresponding to the plurality of display devices, and the image output unit is an image projection device (projector mechanism B2). ), The display control means includes a focal length control means for controlling the focal length of the video output means (step S504 of the start command reception time processing executed by the sub CPU 102), and the display control means An error image stored in the error image storage means is output from the error image corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means to the image output means at the focal length controlled by the focal length control means. You may

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention causes the video output means to output the error video corresponding to the display device specified by the display device specifying means from the error image stored in the error video storage means, so that the video output means It is possible to cause the video output means to output an error video corresponding to the screen on which the video output by the above is displayed.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a non-movable sub-display device (image display device 201a) having a display area narrower than any of the plurality of display devices, and the display control means is the video output means. An error image having the same content as the error image to be output may be displayed on the sub display device.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display area is narrower than any of the plurality of display devices, and the display performance is stable due to the non-movable display device, so that an error relating to the gaming machine can be confirmed. .

  In the conventional game machine having the movable accessory at a plurality of positions as described in JP-A-2014-42693, when various operation controls by the plurality of movable accessory are performed, the positional relationship is inconsistent. However, there is a problem that the movable accessory may not operate normally.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first movable accessory (for example, front screen mechanism E1) and a second reference position (for example, reel standby position) that are movable with reference to a first reference position (for example, front standby position). A plurality of movable accessory members including a second movable accessory object (for example, reel screen mechanism F1) that is movable as a reference, and first accessory object driving means (for example, drive motor E25) for driving the first movable accessory object, Second accessory driving means (for example, drive motor F21) for driving the second movable accessory, and drive control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the first accessory driving means and the second accessory driving means. And a drive position determining means (sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not the first movable accessory is at the first reference position, and the drive control means includes the second movable accessory as the second movable accessory. 2 Move from the reference position At this time, if the accessory position determining means determines that the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position, the first accessory driving means is controlled to move the first movable accessory. It is configured to move to the first reference position.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position when the second movable accessory is moved from the second reference position, the first movable accessory is provided. By moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position after moving the second movable accessory to the first reference position, the positional relationship between the first movable accessory and the second movable accessory becomes inconsistent, and these movable objects are moved. It is possible to prevent the accessory from malfunctioning.

  The game machine according to the present invention further includes an effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing an effect including the movement of the plurality of movable auditors, and the effect executing means includes the second movable auditors as the second movable auditors. When performing the effect of moving from the second reference position, if the first movable accessory is determined not to be in the first reference position by the accessory position determination means, the drive control means After controlling the accessory driving means to move the first movable accessory to the first reference position, the second accessory driving means is controlled to move the second movable accessory from the second reference position. You may make it perform the production | presentation which makes it move.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when performing the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position, the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position by the accessory position determination means. If it is determined that the first movable accessory is moved to the first reference position by the drive control means, then the player is allowed to move the second movable accessory from the second reference position. The production can be executed without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect executing means executes an effect based on effect data representing an effect operation and performs an effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. In addition, when the accessory position determining means determines that the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position, an effect representing an effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. Based on the effect data in which, before the data, effect data representing an effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted, and effect data representing an effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted. The effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position may be executed.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when performing the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position, the first movable accessory is not at the first reference position by the accessory position determination means. When it is determined that, the effect data that represents the effect of moving the first movable accessory to the first reference position is inserted before the effect data that represents the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect of moving the second movable accessory from the second reference position after the first movable accessory is moved to the first reference position by the drive control means.

  A conventional game machine that drives a movable accessory as described in JP-A-2014-42693 by an accessory drive means such as a motor is a movable part of the movable accessory, an accessory drive means, a movable part and an accessory. There is a risk that the movable accessory will not operate normally due to deterioration of the gear mechanism between the drive means and the like. Therefore, measures are required when the movable accessory does not operate normally.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1), an accessory drive unit (for example, a drive motor E25) that drives the movable accessory, and a drive that controls the accessory drive unit. Control means (sub CPU 102), accessory position determination means (sub CPU 102) for determining whether or not the movable accessory is at a reference position (for example, front standby position or front exposed position), and accessory position determination Based on the result of the judgment by the means, equipped with an accessory position error detection means (sub CPU 102) for detecting an error relating to the position of the movable accessory, the accessory position error detection means, at the start of the unit game, When the movable accessory is not at the reference position, an error is detected, and the drive control means is triggered by the error being detected by the accessory position error detection means. If the predetermined error condition has is satisfied, it has the structure to prohibit driving of the movable won game by the won game drive means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention prohibits the driving of the movable accessory when the error relating to the position of the movable accessory is detected, and thus is a special feature for eliminating the error regarding the position of the movable accessory. It is possible to take measures when the movable accessory does not operate normally, without requiring any special processing.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention protects parts such as the movable accessory and accessory driving means in order to prohibit the driving of the movable accessory when an error relating to the position of the movable accessory is detected. You can

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined error condition is that the character position error detection means detects an error continuously a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) at the start of the unit game. It may be established.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention prohibits the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory drive means on the condition that the error is detected a predetermined number of times in succession, so that it is affected by disturbance or the like. It is possible to prevent the driving of the movable accessory from being prohibited when an error relating to the position of the movable accessory is erroneously detected.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the drive control means has been powered on to the gaming machine, or an error has not been detected by the accessory position error detection means at the start of the unit game. With this as a trigger, the number of errors detected by the accessory position error detecting means may be reset.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention eliminates an error relating to the position of the movable accessory by executing the initialization operation by turning on the power of the gaming machine (so-called “power-on reset”). Therefore, when the power is turned on, the number of errors is reset, so that the movable accessory does not need to be specially processed to eliminate the error regarding the position of the movable accessory. You can take measures when it stops working.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the movable accessory is composed of a plurality of screens (a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1), and image output means (projector mechanism B2) for projecting an image on the plurality of screens. ) And a focal length control means for controlling the focal length of the video output means (step S504 of the start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102), and the focal length control means is controlled by the drive control means. The focal length is controlled according to the plurality of screens driven by the controlled accessory driving means, and the focal length is maintained when the driving of the movable accessory by the accessory driving means is prohibited. You may do it.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the driving of the screen by the accessory driving means is prohibited, the focal length is maintained, so that the visibility of the image projected on the screen is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine as described in JP 2012-135540 A, since the image for performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device during the unit game, information about the gaming machine such as the payout table and the arrangement of the symbols. However, there is a problem that the effect is interrupted when is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention responds to an image display device (201a) that displays an image, a contact input device (touch sensor 201b) that is superimposed on the image display device and is capable of contact input, and an operation on the contact input device. The display control means (sub CPU 102) for displaying an image representing the information displayed on the image display device, and the game information recording means (sub CPU 102) for recording the game information representing the content of the game. , An image (top screen 212) representing information about a game is displayed on the image display device according to the operation of the contact input device, and even during a unit game, according to the operation of the contact input device. , A user interface image (menu screen 216) for performing various operations of recording game information by the game information recording means is displayed on the image display device. After, having a configuration in accordance with an operation of the touch input device, allowing various operations of the recording of the game information by the gaming information recording means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with an image display device capable of displaying information relating to the game in addition to the display means for displaying the effect image during the unit game. However, information about the game can be displayed without interrupting the effect.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, various operations for recording game information by the game information recording means include start of recording game information by the game information recording means and recording of game information by the game information recording means. It may be possible to perform an operation of referring to and ending the recording of the game information by the game information recording means.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention starts the recording of the game information, refers to the recording of the game information, and records the game information according to the operation of the contact input device even during the unit game. The end can be executed by the player.

  In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-167192, it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern on the decorative sheet when the light source is off. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem in that it is difficult for the player to understand where the lighting state is before and when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display unit (display unit 100) for displaying an image, a protective cover (20) provided on the front surface of the display unit and capable of visually recognizing the image displayed on the display unit, Decorative parts (22a, 22b) arranged inside the protective cover and decorated with a pattern representing a game state, light sources (decorative LEDs 23a, 23b) for irradiating light from the back surface of the decorative part, and lighting states of the light sources. And a light source control means (sub CPU 102) for controlling the light source control means, wherein the light source control means moves the game state to the predetermined game state in a state where the game state has not moved to the predetermined game state. Compared to the state, the light source is turned on at a lower brightness, and the pattern decorated on the decoration portion is configured to be visible from the outside of the protective cover even when the light source is turned on at a lower brightness. .

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention makes it possible to visually recognize the pattern decorated on the decorative portion by turning on the light source of the decorative portion with low brightness even if the gaming state has not transitioned to the predetermined gaming state. For the sake of simplification, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know where to light when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the protective cover may have a light shielding property with respect to light incident from the outside to the inside.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the protective cover has a light-shielding property with respect to light incident from the outside to the inside. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the light source control means, when turning off the light source, converts the light source data for turning off the light source into light source data for turning on at a predetermined low brightness, and converts the light source data. The lighting state of the light source may be controlled based on the light source data.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention, when turning off the light source, converts the light source data for turning off the light source into the light source data for turning on at a predetermined low brightness, and based on the converted light source data, Since the lighting state of the light source is controlled, only by converting the light source data, the light source can be turned on with low brightness during the period when the light source is required to be turned off.

  The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-146523 prompts the operation of the effect button for advancing the effect by lighting the LED provided on the effect button. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-178972, an image for notifying the timing of operating the effect button is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, by turning on the LED provided on the effect button for advancing the effect, an image for prompting the operation of the effect button and notifying the timing of operating the effect button is displayed on the liquid crystal display. When displaying on a display means such as a device, the player may feel uncomfortable if the state of the LED provided on the effect button and the image displayed on the display means are not linked.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display unit (display unit 100) for displaying a production image, a production operation unit (chance button 33) used for production, and a production operation light source provided in the production operation unit ( Chance button LED34), effect determination means (sub CPU 102) for determining effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and effect operation display means for causing the display means to display an image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determination means. The sub CPU 102) and the effect operation detecting means (chance switch 35) for detecting the operation of the effect operation means, and the effect operation display means is the effect determination triggered by the operation of the effect operation means. When determined by the means, the image for prompting the operation of the effect operation means is displayed on the display means, and the effect operation light source is turned on. When the operation of the effect operation means is detected by the effect operation detection means, the display of the image prompting the operation of the effect operation means by the display means is terminated and the effect operation light source is turned off. Have.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the light emission of the production operation light source provided in the production operation means and the display of the image prompting the operation of the production operation means are linked, and the production operation light source is turned off and the production operation is performed. Since the end of the display of the image for prompting the operation of the means is interlocked with, it is possible to prompt the player for the operation for rendering without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect determination means determines an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means based on a predetermined lottery value and a random number for random determination, and the effect operation When the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means is determined by the effect determination means, the display means imitates the shape of the effect operation means in a substantially central area of the display area of the display means. You may make it display a video.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means based on the predetermined lottery value and the random number value for the lottery, and therefore the operation of the effect operation means is performed. It is possible to execute the production triggered by the trigger at an appropriate frequency.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when performing an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, an image simulating the shape of the effect operation means is displayed in a substantially central area of the display area of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to urge the operation of the effect operation means to be visually easy to understand.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, although the operation of the effect button is urged, when the operation effective for the progress of the game is performed without operating the effect button, the effect button is pressed. There is a problem in that the effect due to the operation of is not executed and the interest of the player cannot be improved by the effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means (display unit 100) for displaying the effect video, the effect operation means (chance button 33) used for the effect, and the effect determination that determines the effect according to the progress of the game. Means (sub CPU 102), effect executing means (sub CPU 102) for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and effect image for causing the display means to display an image corresponding to the effect determined by the effect determining means. The display means (sub-CPU 102) and the effect operation detecting means (chance switch 35) for detecting the operation of the effect operation means are provided, and the effect image display means has an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means. When it is determined by the effect determination means, an image prompting the operation of the effect operation means is displayed on the display means, and the effect operation detection hand is displayed. When the operation of the effect operation means is detected by or the predetermined execution condition different from the operation of the effect operation means is satisfied, the display of the image urging the operation of the effect operation means by the display means When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied in a state in which the effect determined by the operation of the effect operation means has been determined by the effect determination means, the effect operation means causes the effect operation means to end. It has a configuration for executing an effect triggered by the operation of.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when performing the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, if the predetermined execution condition is satisfied even if the effect operation means is not operated Since the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means is executed, the interest of the player can be improved by the effect.

  The game machine according to the present invention further includes a game medium detecting means (medal sensor 46 and BET switch 62) for detecting the insertion of the game medium, and the predetermined execution condition is the game medium detecting means. May be further included.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when performing an effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means, even if the effect operation means is not operated, the game is performed for the next unit game. Since the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means is executed when the medium is inserted, the effect triggered by the operation of the effect operation means can be executed almost certainly.

  In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-146588, the operating order of the stop operations may greatly affect the profits obtained by the player. If the sex is not guaranteed, there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a video output unit (projector mechanism B2) for outputting a video and a plurality of display devices (a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1 and a display unit capable of displaying the video output by the video output unit). A reel screen mechanism F1), a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , Start operation detecting means (start switch 64) for detecting the start operation of the game, and symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation of the game by the start operation detecting means ( Stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R), and based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, an internal winning probability is selected from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined winning probability. An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining a winning combination, a stop operation detecting means (stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels, for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Stop notification means (main CPU 93 and sub CPU 102) for notifying the operation sequence of the stop operation based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and at least one of the plurality of display devices. A display device (reel screen mechanism F1) is configured to be movable, and the stop notification unit displays an operation order notification image indicating an operation order of the stop operation in a display area of any one of the plurality of display devices. Is displayed, and the area for displaying the operation sequence notification image moves according to the movable position of the display device configured to be movable. Uni has a configuration to switch the operation sequence informs the video to the video output unit.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the operation sequence indicating the operation sequence of the stop operation is moved so that the region for displaying the operation sequence notification image moves according to the movable position of the display device configured to be movable. By switching the notification video to the video output means, the visibility of the operation order notification video is secured, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of display devices are configured to be movable together with a first display device (fixed screen mechanism D) on which the operation order notification image is displayed by the stop notification means. A second display device (reel screen mechanism F1), the first display device has a plurality of display regions including a first display region and a second display region, and the second display device is the first display region. 1 display device is movable to an exposure position where it is exposed so as to cover, and when the second display device is not at the exposure position, the stop notification means responds to the first display area of the first display device. When the operation order notification image is displayed on the first display area of the first display device and the second display device is at the exposure position, the operation order notification image is displayed according to the second display area of the first display area. Operation order notification video It may be displayed in the second display area of the display device.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first display area of the first display device is provided when the second display device that is movable to the exposure position where it is exposed so as to cover the first display device is not at the exposure position. When the operation order notification image corresponding to the second display area is displayed on the first display area of the first display device and the second display apparatus is at the exposure position, the operation order notification image corresponding to the second display area of the first display apparatus is displayed. By displaying in the second display area of the first display device, the visibility of the operation order notification image is ensured, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first display device includes a front surface (reflection surface of the front reflection portion D1), a left surface (reflection surface of the left reflection portion D3) and a right surface (reflective surface of the left reflection portion D3) arranged on the left and right of the front surface. The right surface reflection portion D2) and the lower surface (the reflection surface of the lower surface reflection portion D4) sandwiched between the left surface and the right surface on the lower side of the front surface, and the first display device of the first display device. A display area may be included in the front surface, and a second display area of the first display area may be included in the lower surface.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention is included in the front surface of the first display device when the second display device that is movable to the exposure position where the first display device is exposed is not at the exposure position. By displaying the operation order notification image in the first display area and displaying the operation order notification image in the second display area included in the lower surface of the first display device when the second display device is at the exposed position, Since the visibility of the operation order notification image is ensured, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-131586, when a special winning combination is won, there is a possibility that the player's interest may be reduced because the game is not advantageous to the player.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And a start operation detecting means (start switch 64) for detecting a start operation of the game, and a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation of the game by the start operation detecting means. (Stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R), an internal winning combination determination means (main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations at a predetermined winning probability based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, Stop operation detecting means (stop switch 17S) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining hand. Based on the internal winning combination determined by and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Based on a combination of reel stop control means (main CPU 93 and stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R) and the symbols stopped on the effective line of the symbol display means by stopping the fluctuation of the symbols by the reel stop control means. Based on the fact that a specific internal winning combination has been determined by the winning determination means (main CPU 93) and the internal winning combination determination means for determining whether a winning or non-winning of a winning combination is achieved, a specific advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, , CT) a specific advantageous state transition means (main CPU 93) for transitioning the game state to the inside, Stop notification means (main CPU 93 and sub CPU 102) for notifying the operation sequence of the stop operation based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means, wherein the stop notification means is in the specific advantageous state. In the unit game performed on the basis of the fact that the predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "3 consecutive chilirip") is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the predetermined internal winning combination is added value (for example, normal When the duration of ART is added), the operation sequence of the stop operation for stopping the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination on the activated line is notified, and the predetermined internal winning combination is given. When it has no added value, the operation sequence of the stop operation for stopping a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination on the activated line Is configured to be notified.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention, when internally winning the predetermined internal winning combination, if the predetermined internal winning combination has added value, a combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination is provided. Notify the operation sequence of the stop operation to stop on the activated line, if the predetermined internal winning combination has no added value, the combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination is on the activated line. By notifying the operation sequence of the stop operation to be stopped, even if the combination of symbols based on a predetermined internal winning combination is stopped on the activated line, the situation in which the player cannot obtain added value is avoided. .

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the interest of the player because the player cannot obtain the added value even if the combination of symbols based on the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped on the activated line. It can be prevented from lowering.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a video output unit (projector mechanism B2) for outputting an image for effect, and a display device (fixed screen mechanism D, front which can display the image for effect output by the image output unit). A screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1) may be further provided, and the stop notification means may notify the operation order of the stop operations by the effect image.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can variously notify the operation sequence of the stop operation.

  In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-042693, a slight deviation occurs between the movable position of the movable accessory recognized by the control program and the actual movable position of the movable accessory. If it occurs, the deviation may cause further deviation, resulting in inconsistency in the effect using the movable accessory, which may give the player discomfort.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, a front screen mechanism E1) that is movable between a first position (for example, a front standby position) and a second position (for example, a front exposed position), and the movable device. Drive control for managing the movable position of the movable accessory by updating the number of steps based on the accessory drive means (for example, drive motor E25) for driving the accessory and the reference unit of movement of the accessory drive means. And a first position sensor (for example, a front standby position sensor E15a) for detecting that the movable accessory is at the first position (step count “0”). The drive control means corrects the number of steps to a first value (step count “19”) when the first position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, and the first position sensor There when changes from the sensing state to the non-detection state, has a configuration for correcting the number of the steps a second value (step count "23").

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first position sensor for detecting that the movable accessory is at the first position changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, the number of steps is set to the first step. When the first position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state and when the detection state changes from the detection state to the non-detection state, the number of steps is corrected to the second value. The error in the number of steps when the state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, due to the deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory managed by the drive control means and the actual movable position of the movable accessory, inconsistency occurs in the effect using the movable accessory. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a second position sensor (for example, front exposure position sensor E15b) for detecting that the movable accessory is at the second position (step count “210”). The drive control means corrects the number of steps to a third value (step count “192”) when the second position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state, and the second position sensor The number of steps may be corrected to a fourth value (step count “188”) when the detected state changes to the non-detected state.

  With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second position sensor for detecting that the movable accessory is in the second position is changed from the non-detection state to the detection state, the number of steps is set to the third step. When the second position sensor changes from the non-detection state to the detection state and when the detection state changes from the detection state to the non-detection state, the number of steps is corrected to the fourth value. The error in the number of steps when the state is changed to the non-detection state is eliminated.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, due to the deviation between the movable position of the movable accessory managed by the drive control means and the actual movable position of the movable accessory, inconsistency occurs in the effect using the movable accessory. It is possible to prevent more reliably.

(Invention of curved portion)
Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 06-035066 proposes a gaming machine that enlarges and projects a video for a game on a display screen (screen) provided in the front of a gaming machine housing by using a liquid crystal projector provided therein. There is.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the display unit on which the image is projected.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the effect using the display unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later),
A display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a display portion (for example, a rear screen G3 described later) having a display surface forming portion (for example, a curved portion G22 described later) that forms the display surface. Prepare,
A game machine characterized in that the display surface forming portion is curved so that both end portions in the width direction (for example, side plate portions G25 described later) are closer to the projector than the center portion in the same direction.

Further, the gaming machine includes a rotatable movable portion (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15 described later) arranged closer to the projector than the display surface,
The movable unit may be capable of displaying an image projected by the projector.

Further, the gaming machine includes a support portion (for example, a frame portion G23 described later) that rotatably supports the movable portion,
A drive unit (for example, a stepping motor G31 described later) which is arranged farther from the projector than the display surface forming unit and drives the movable unit;
A transmission unit (for example, a motor connection gear G32, a transmission gear G34, a louver drive gear G33 described later) that transmits the driving force of the drive unit to the movable unit,
An accommodating part (for example, a cover body G7 described later) that accommodates the transmitting part may be formed in the supporting part.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the display unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Invention related to painting of rear screen)
Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 06-035066 proposes a game machine that enlarges and projects a moving picture for a game on a display screen (screen) provided on the front surface of a game machine housing by using a liquid crystal projector provided therein.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the display unit on which the image is projected.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the effect using the display unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later),
A display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a display portion (for example, a rear screen G3 described later) having a display surface forming portion (for example, a curved portion G22 described later) that forms the display surface. Prepare,
The display surface forming portion is formed of black resin,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display surface has a silver-colored underlayer formed by painting and a white surface layer covering the underlayer.

The gaming machine includes a rotatable movable portion (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15 described later) arranged closer to the projector than the display surface,
The movable part is capable of displaying an image projected by the projector,
A portion of the movable portion that can display an image projected by the projector may include a silver-colored underlayer formed by painting and a white surface layer that covers the underlayer.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the display unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Invention related to protrusion of louver connection gear)
Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-178405 discloses a movable member that is movably arranged, a drive unit that moves the movable member along a trajectory, an acceleration sensor that detects the inclination of the movable member, and a trajectory and an acceleration sensor. A game machine having a position calculation means for calculating the position of the moving member from the relationship with the tilted position has been proposed.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the technology for improving the drive control accuracy of the movable accessory.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the accuracy of drive control of a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A movable accessory (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15 described later) that is rotated by the drive of the drive unit,
A gear that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the movable accessory (for example, a louver driving gear G33 described below),
A first detected portion and a second detected portion (for example, two protrusions G41 described later) provided on the outer peripheral portion of the gear,
A detection unit (for example, a sensor G40 described later) that detects the first detected portion and the second detected portion,
A game machine characterized in that the first detected portion and the second detected portion are arranged on the same straight line in the radial direction passing through the center of the gear.

Further, the gaming machine includes a projector that projects an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later),
The movable accessory is provided with a first surface (for example, a first surface G21a described later) that forms a display surface on which an image projected by the projector can be displayed, and a second surface on the opposite side of the first surface. A movable portion that has a surface (for example, a second surface G21b described later) and is rotatably provided,
When the detection unit detects the first detected portion or the second detected portion, the first surface or the second surface may be substantially parallel to the player.

  According to the present invention, the accuracy of drive control of a movable accessory can be improved.

(Invention related to decoration)
Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-210690 proposes a gaming machine including a decorative lamp and a lens member that covers the decorative lamp from the front side.

  However, there is room for improvement in the light emission effect by the light emitting unit.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of light emission effect by the light emitting unit.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A light emitting unit (for example, an LED 410 described later),
A light transmissive portion (for example, a light transmissive member 405 described below) formed of a light transmissive material and covering the light emitting portion,
The light transmitting portion is a polyhedron having vertices,
The gaming machine, wherein the light emitting unit is arranged at a position corresponding to the apex.

Further, the gaming machine includes a light diffusing section (for example, light diffusing sheets 404a and 404b described later) which is disposed between the light transmitting section and the light emitting section and which diffuses light emitted from the light emitting section. ,
A predetermined space may be provided between a portion of the light transmitting portion where the light emitted from the light emitting portion is transmitted and the light diffusing portion.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of light emission effect by the light emitting unit.

  (Invention related to production lottery based on production state)

  Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-17520 proposes a game machine in which a sub CPU and a torch drive circuit drive a torch according to torch drive data specified by the effect contents.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are few types of effects using torches, which are movable parts, and there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is capable of various effects using a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for controlling the effect of the game,
A game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for controlling a game state (for example, a normal game state or CZ described later),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) for determining an internal winning combination,
And a plurality of movable accessory objects (for example, a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1 in the display unit 200 described later) which are different from each other in the effect mode.
Each of the plurality of movable accessory objects is in a state where effects can be executed (for example, front exposure position and reel exposure position described later) and a state where effects cannot be executed (for example, front standby position and reel standby position described later). Can be set to
The effect control means determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the game state, and the state of the movable winning object. Amusement machine.

Further, the gaming machine includes a projector that projects an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later),
Each of the plurality of movable accessory members is a display unit capable of displaying an image projected by the projector,
The state in which the effect can be executed is a state in which an image projected by the projector can be displayed,
The state in which the effect cannot be executed may be a state in which the image projected by the projector cannot be displayed.

  According to the present invention, various effects can be performed using a movable accessory.

  (Invention related to production using louver board)

  Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-17520 proposes a game machine in which a sub CPU and a torch drive circuit drive a torch according to torch drive data specified by the effect contents.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are few types of effects using torches, which are movable parts, and there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is capable of various effects using a movable accessory.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) for determining an internal winning combination,
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and 51L, 51C, 51R described later) configured by a plurality of display columns to variably display symbols necessary for the game,
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R described later) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of display columns and receiving a stop operation of the player;
Stop operation detecting means for detecting stop operation (for example, a stop switch 17S described later),
A stop control unit (for example, a main control circuit 96 described later) that stops and controls the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination unit and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection unit,
Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for controlling the effect of the game,
A projector for projecting an image (for example, an irradiation light device B described later),
A first surface (for example, a first surface G21a described later) forming a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a second surface opposite to the first surface (for example, a later-described first surface G21a). A plurality of movable accessory members (for example, louver plates G13, G14, G15) that have a second surface G21b) and are rotatably provided,
The plurality of movable accessory corresponds to the plurality of stop operation means,
The effect control means,
During the performance of the game, the plurality of movable accessory members are rotated, and the rotation of the movable accessory member corresponding to the stop operation means that has accepted the stop operation is caused by the first surface or the second surface being substantially different from the player. A game machine characterized in that the image projected by a projector is displayed on the first surface or the second surface of the movable accessory that is stopped at a position in parallel.

  According to the present invention, various effects can be performed using a movable accessory.

  Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 06-035066 proposes a game machine that enlarges and projects a video for a game on a display screen (screen) provided on the front surface of a game machine housing by using a liquid crystal projector provided therein. There is.

  However, there is room for further improvement in the display unit on which the image is projected.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the effect using the display unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A gaming machine comprising a projector (for example, an irradiation light device B described later) and a movable member (for example, a front screen mechanism E1 or a reel screen mechanism F1 described later) that reflects the projection light emitted from the projector,
The movable member is displaceable between a first position (for example, a front standby position or a reel standby position described later) and a second position (for example, a front exposed position or a reel exposed position described later),
In the effect accompanied by the displacement of the movable member from the first position to the second position, the projection of the effect image is started before the displacement is completed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the display unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

1 Pachi-slot machine (gaming machine)
3L, 3C, 3R reels (variable display)
4 Display window (pattern display means)
17S stop switch (stop operation detection means)
20 Protective cover 22a, 22b Decorative part 23a, 23b Decorative LED (light source)
33 Chance button (production operation means)
34 Chance button LED (light source for production operation)
35 Chance switch (production operation detection means)
46 medal sensor (game medium detection means)
51L, 51C, 51R Stepping motor (symbol variation means, reel stop control means) 62 BET switch (game medium detection means)
64 Start switch (Start operation detection means)
74 24h Door open / close monitoring unit (error detection means)
76 ROM cartridge board (error image storage means)
93 main CPU (internal winning combination determination means, reel stop control means, winning determination means, specific advantageous state transition means, notification means, stop notification means, game control means)
100 display unit (display means)
102 sub CPU (drive control means, effect execution means, character position determination means, character position determination means, character position error detection means, display control means, game information recording means, light source control means, display device specifying means, effect (Decision means, effect operation display means, effect image display means, notification means, stop notification means, error display means, focal length control means, effect control means)
200 display unit 201a image display device (sub display device)
201b Touch sensor (contact input device)
B2 Projector mechanism (video output means, video projection device)
D Fixed screen mechanism (display device)
E1 Front screen mechanism (movable accessory, display device)
F1 reel screen mechanism (movable accessory, display device)
E25 drive motor (first accessory driving means, accessory driving means)
F21 drive motor (second accessory driving means, accessory driving means)
G Fixed screen mechanism G1 Louver screen G2 Louver drive mechanism G3 Rear screen G4, G5, G6 Louver drive part G7 Cover body G8 Lower cover part G9 Upper cover part G10 Upper surface part G11 Side part G12 Slope part G13 Louver plate G14 Louver plate G15 Louver plate G21a 1st surface G21b 2nd surface G22 curved part G23 frame part G24 rear plate part G25 side plate part G31 stepping motor G32 motor connection gear G33 louver drive gear G34 transmission gear G40 sensor G41 protrusion part

Claims (1)

An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
A variable display means that is composed of a plurality of display columns and that variably displays the symbols required for the game,
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of display columns to receive a stop operation of the player;
Stop operation detecting means for detecting stop operation,
Stop control means for stopping and controlling the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
A projector that projects an image,
A plurality of rotatably provided movable accessory members each having a first surface forming a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector and a second surface opposite to the first surface; ,,
The plurality of movable accessory corresponds to the plurality of stop operation means,
The effect control means,
During the performance of the game, the plurality of movable accessory members are rotated, and the rotation of the movable accessory member corresponding to the stop operation means that has accepted the stop operation is caused by the first surface or the second surface being substantially different from the player. A game machine characterized in that the image projected by a projector is displayed on the first surface or the second surface of the movable accessory that is stopped at a position in parallel.

Images